Мфу canon i sensys mf232w инструкция

MF244dw / MF232w / MF231

Руководство пользователя

USRMA-1413-00 2016-09 ru

Copyright CANON INC. 2016

Важные указания по технике безопасности

189L-000

В этой главе обсуждаются правила техники безопасности, которым следует придерживаться во избежание

травм пользователей устройства и др. лиц, а также повреждения техники. Перед использованием устройства

ознакомьтесь с этой главой и придерживайтесь инструкций для надлежащей эксплуатации устройства. Не

выполняйте каких-либо действий, описание которых отсутствует в настоящем руководстве. Canon не несет

ответственность за любые повреждения, возникшие вследствие осуществления действий, не указанных в

настоящем руководстве, ненадлежащего использования устройства или проведения ремонтных работ и

внесения изменений третьими лицами и организациями, не являющимися представителями Canon или не

имеющих авторизацию компании Canon.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

2

Установка

189L-001

Для безопасной и удобной эксплуатации устройства следует внимательно ознакомиться с приведенными ниже

мерами предосторожности и установить устройство в приемлемом для него месте.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с высоким риском возгорания или
поражения электрическим током.

Место, где будут закрыты вентиляционные отверстия
(слишком близко к стенам, кроватям, коврам или похожим объектам).

Влажное или запыленное помещение.

Место, подверженное воздействию прямого солнечного света, или на открытом воздухе.

Место, подверженное воздействию высоких температур.

Место вблизи открытого огня.

Рядом со спиртом, растворителями и другими легковоспламеняющимися веществами.

Прочие предупреждения

Не подсоединяйте к данному аппарату несертифицированные кабели. Несоблюдение этого
требования может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Не помещайте на аппарат браслеты и другие металлические предметы или емкости с водой. Контакт
посторонних веществ с электрическими компонентами внутри устройства может стать причиной
возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

При установке и удалении дополнительных аксессуаров убедитесь, что устройство выключено,
отсоедините штепсель шнура питания и отключите от устройства все интерфейсные кабели и шнур
питания. В противном случае шнур питания и интерфейсные кабели можно повредить, что может
стать причиной пожара или удара электротоком.

Не используйте данный аппарат рядом с любым медицинским оборудованием. Радиоволны,
излучаемые данным устройством, могут создавать помехи для работы медицинского оборудования,
что может привести к сбою оборудования и несчастному случаю с тяжкими последствиями.

Если в устройство попадают инородные вещества, отключите шнур питания от электрической
розетки и обратитесь к местному уполномоченному дилеру Canon.

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже
местах.

Устройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

Неустойчивая поверхность

Место, подверженное вибрации.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

3

Прочие меры предосторожности

При перемещении данного устройства следуйте инструкциям, приведенным в настоящем
руководстве. При неправильном перемещении устройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

При установке устройства избегайте защемления рук между устройством и полом или стенами, а
также между лотками для бумаги. Это может привести к травмам.

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже местах, так как это может
привести к травме.

Место, подверженное резким перепадам температуры или
влажности

Места вблизи оборудования, создающего магнитные или
электромагнитные волны

Лаборатория или место, где происходят химические
реакции

Место, подверженное воздействию коррозионно-активных
или токсичных газов

Место, которое может деформироваться под действием
веса устройства или где устройство может осесть (ковер и
т. п.)

Избегайте мест установки с плохой вентиляцией.

Во время использования это устройство генерирует озон в малых объемах. Несмотря на различную

восприимчивость к озону его количество не является опасным. Наличие озона может стать ощутимым в

течение длительного использования, особенно в плохо проветриваемых помещениях. Рекомендуется

обеспечить надлежащую вентиляцию помещения, где работает устройство, c целью поддержания

благоприятной для работы среды. Также следует избегать мест, в которых люди наиболее подвержены

воздействию выбросов устройства.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с повышенной конденсацией

При интенсивном обогреве помещения, в котором установлено устройство, а также в случаях

перемещения устройства из среды с более прохладным или сухим воздухом в помещения с более

высокой температурой или повышенным уровнем влажности, внутри устройства могут образоваться

капли воды (конденсат). Использование устройства в подобных условиях может привести к замятию

бумаги, плохому качеству печати или повреждению устройства. Перед использованием устройство

должно не менее двух часов адаптироваться к окружающей температуре и влажности.

При использовании беспроводной локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

Устанавливайте устройство на расстоянии не более 50 м от беспроводного LAN-роутера.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте, где другие объекты могут препятствовать связи. Мощность
сигнала может значительно падать при прохождении через стены или полы.

Размещайте устройство как можно дальше от цифровых беспроводных телефонов, микроволновых
печей и другого оборудования, являющегося источником радиоволн.

На высоте 3 000 м над уровнем моря и выше

Устройства с жестким диском могут работать неправильно на высоте около 3 000 метров и больше над

уровнем моря.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

4

Нажмите на кнопку для помощи

Характеристики, спецификации

Особенности:

Apple AirPrint,

Размер упаковки (ДхШхВ), см:

52 x 50 x 42 см, вес 14.22 кг

Ссылка на сайт производителя:

www.canon.com

Производитель:

CANON Inc.

Страна производства:

КОРЕЯ, РЕСПУБЛИКА

Инструкция к Лазерному МФУ Canon i-SENSYS MF232w

background image

MF244dw / MF232w / MF231

Руководство пользователя

USRMA-1413-00 2017-05 ru

Copyright CANON INC. 2017

background image

Содержание

Важные указания по технике безопасности

 …………………………………………………………. 2

Установка

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  3

Источник питания

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Обращение

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………  8

Расходные материалы

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  9

Основные операции

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13

Компоненты и их функции

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  15

Передняя сторона

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  16

Задняя сторона

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  18

Внутренние детали

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  20

Отверстие для ручной подачи

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………  21

Лоток для бумаги

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  22

Панель управления

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 23

Дисплей

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 30

Использование панели управления

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………  34

Ввод текста

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  36

Размещение документов

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 39

Загрузка бумаги

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 43

Загрузка бумаги в лоток

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  45

Загрузка бумаги в отверстие для ручной подачи

 ……………………………………………………………………………………  48

Загрузка конвертов

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  50

Загрузка уже отпечатанной бумаги

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 52

Определение формата и типа бумаги

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 54

Регистрация специального формата бумаги

 ……………………………………………………………………………………. 56

Переход в бесшумный режим

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 58

Переход в спящий режим

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  60

Установка времени автоматического выключения

 ………………………………………………………………………………… 62

Копирование

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 64

Основные операции копирования

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 66

Отмена копирования

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  68

Различные настройки копирования

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 70

Увеличение или уменьшение

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 71

Выбор типа документа

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  72

Настройка плотности

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  73

Настройка резкости

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 74

Двустороннее копирование (MF244dw)

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..  76

Копирование нескольких документов на одном листе (2 на 1/4 на 1)

 …………………………………………………………. 78

Использование клавиши [Paper Save Copy] (MF244dw/MF231)

 …………………………………………………………………… 80

I

background image

Копирование обеих сторон удостоверения личности на одной странице

 ……………………………………………………  82

Сортировка копий по страницам

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  84

Изменение параметров по умолчанию

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..  85

Использование аппарата в качестве принтера

 ………………………………………………..  87

Печать с компьютера

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  88

Печать документа

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  89

Отмена печати

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 93

Проверка состояния печати

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 96

Различные параметры печати

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………  97

Увеличение или уменьшение

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 99

Включение односторонней и двухсторонней печати (MF244dw)

 ………………………………………………………… 101

Сортировка распечаток по страницам

 ………………………………………………………………………………………….  103

Печать нескольких страниц на одном листе

 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 105

Печать плакатов

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  107

Печать буклетов (MF244dw)

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  109

Печать кромок

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 111

Печать дат и номеров страниц

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………  112

Печать водяных знаков

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 114

Выбор типа документа

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  116

Экономия тонера

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  118

Объединение и печать нескольких документов

 ……………………………………………………………………………..  120

Настройка параметров печати под потребности пользователя

 ………………………………………………………………. 124

Регистрация комбинаций часто используемых настроек печати

 ……………………………………………………….. 125

Изменение параметров по умолчанию

 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 127

Использование устройства в качестве сканера

 ……………………………………………..  130

Подготовка к использованию аппарата в качестве сканера (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ………………………………………..  132

Сканирование на аппарате

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 133

Сканирование с помощью клавиши [Scan -> PC]

 …………………………………………………………………………………..  136

Сканирование на компьютере

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 140

Сканирование с помощью приложения

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………..  141

Настройки параметров сканирования в ScanGear MF

 ……………………………………………………………………………. 143

Удобное использование с мобильным устройством (MF244dw/

MF232w)

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  145

Подключение к мобильному устройству

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 146

Прямое соединение (режим точки доступа)

 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 147

Оптимальное использование возможностей аппарата с помощью приложений

 ……………………………………… 150

Использование AirPrint

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  151

Печать с помощью AirPrint

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………  156

Сканирование с помощью AirPrint

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….  159

Если не удается воспользоваться функцией AirPrint

 ………………………………………………………………………… 161

Использование Виртуального принтера Google

 …………………………………………………………………………………..  162

Удаленное управление аппаратом

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………  166

II

background image

Сеть (MF244dw/MF232w)

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….  168

Подключение к сети

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  169

Выбор проводной или беспроводной локальной сети

 …………………………………………………………………………..  171

Подключение к проводной локальной сети

 ………………………………………………………………………………………..  172

Подключение к беспроводной локальной сети

 ……………………………………………………………………………………. 173

Настройка подключения с помощью функции WPS (режим нажатия кнопки)

 ……………………………………….. 175

Настройка подключения с помощью функции WPS (режим PIN-кода)

 ………………………………………………….  178

Настройка подключения путем выбора беспроводного маршрутизатора

 ……………………………………………. 181

Настройка подключения путем детального задания параметров

 ……………………………………………………….  184

Проверка SSID и ключа сети

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….  188

Настройка IP-адреса

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 191

Настройка адреса IPv4

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 192

Настройка адресов IPv6

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 195

Просмотр параметров сети

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 199

Настройка аппарата для печати с помощью компьютера

 ………………………………………………………………………  202

Настройка протоколов печати и функций WSD

 ……………………………………………………………………………………. 203

Настройка портов принтера

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  206

Настройка сервера печати

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  209

Настройка аппарата для сетевой среды

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 213

Настройка параметров Ethernet

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 214

Изменение максимального блока передачи

 ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 216

Настройка времени ожидания при подключении к сети

 ………………………………………………………………………..  217

Настройка DNS

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 218

Настройка SNTP

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  222

Мониторинг и контроль аппарата с помощью SNMP

 …………………………………………………………………………….  224

Безопасность

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  230

Защита аппарата от несанкционированного доступа

 ……………………………………………………………………………. 231

Предотвращение несанкционированного доступа

 ……………………………………………………………………………….  232

Настройка прав доступа

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  234

Настройка PIN-кода администратора системы

 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 235

Настройка PIN-кода для Удаленного ИП (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………… 237

Ограничение связи посредством брандмауэров (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ………………………………………………………..  239

Указание IP-адресов по правилам брандмауэра

 ……………………………………………………………………………..  240

Указание MAC-адресов по правилам брандмауэра

 ………………………………………………………………………….  244

Изменение номеров портов (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ………………………………………………………………………………….. 247

Настройка прокси (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 249

Ограничение функций аппарата (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………………………..  251

Отключение соединения HTTP

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 252

Отключение Удаленного ИП

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 253

Реализация функций надежной защиты (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ………………………………………………………………….. 254

Включение функции шифрованной связи TLS для Удаленного ИП

 …………………………………………………………… 255

Настройка аутентификации IEEE 802.1X

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 258

Настройка параметров для пар ключей и цифровых сертификатов

 …………………………………………………………. 263

III

background image

Создание пар ключей

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 265

Использование пар ключей и цифровых сертификатов, выданных центром сертификации (СА)

 ………………. 272

Проверка пары ключей и цифровых сертификатов

 …………………………………………………………………………  276

Использование Удаленного ИП (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………..  279

Запуск Удаленного ИП

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  280

Экраны Удаленного ИП

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  282

Управление документами и проверка состояния аппарата

 ……………………………………………………………………. 285

Настройка параметров меню с помощью Удаленного ИП

 ………………………………………………………………………. 289

Список меню настройки

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………..  292

Прямое соединение (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 293

Настройки сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..  294

Вывод отчетов

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  304

Настройки

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 308

Настройки таймера

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  312

Общие настройки (MF244dw)

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  317

Настройки копирования

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 319

Настройки сканирования

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  321

Настройки принтера

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 323

Настройка/Обслуживание

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  334

Настройки управления системой

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 340

Устранение неполадок

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………  349

Устранение замятия бумаги

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 351

Если появляется сообщение об ошибке

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 357

Распространенные проблемы

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 365

Проблемы, связанные с установкой и настройкой

 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 366

Проблемы при копировании/печати

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………  370

Печать выполняется неправильно

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………  373

Неудовлетворительные результаты печати

 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 375

Скручивание или заламывание бумаги

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 381

Бумага подается неправильно

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 383

Если проблему не удается устранить

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 385

Обслуживание

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  387

Очистка аппарата

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  388

Корпус

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 389

Стекло экспонирования

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  390

Податчик (MF244dw)

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 393

Узел фиксации

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  394

Внутренняя часть аппарата

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 395

Замена картриджей с тонером

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 397

Перед заменой картриджа с тонером

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 399

IV

background image

Процедура замены картриджей с тонером

 ………………………………………………………………………………………….  401

Перемещение аппарата

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 404

Просмотр значения счетчика

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  406

Инициализация настроек

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 407

Инициализация меню

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 408

Инициализируйте счетчик отчета Eco (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………………………………… 410

Инициализация всех данных/параметров

 ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 411

Приложение

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  413

Программное обеспечение сторонних производителей (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………………..  414

Ключевые моменты функций

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 415

Забота об окружающей среде и экономия средств

 ……………………………………………………………………………….. 416

Повышение производительности

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 418

Применение в мире цифровых технологий

 ………………………………………………………………………………………… 420

Другие функции

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  422

Технические характеристики

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 424

Технические характеристики аппарата

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………  425

Технические характеристики беспроводной локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

 ……………………………………….. 427

Тип документа

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  428

Область сканирования

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 429

Бумага

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 430

Технические характеристики копирования

 …………………………………………………………………………………………  432

Технические характеристики сканера

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..  433

Технические характеристики принтера

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 434

Расходные материалы

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….  435

Руководства, входящие в комплект поставки устройства

 ……………………………………………………………………… 436

Использование Руководство пользователя

 ………………………………………………………………………………………….  437

Макет экрана Руководство пользователя

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………  438

Просмотр Руководство пользователя

 ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 442

Другое

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  443

Основные операции в среде Windows

 ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 444

Примечание

 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………  453

V

background image

Важные указания по технике
безопасности

Важные указания по технике безопасности 

…………………………………………………………………….  2

Установка 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3

Источник питания 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5

Обращение 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..  6

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры 

…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8

Расходные материалы 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

Важные указания по технике безопасности

1

background image

Важные указания по технике безопасности

189L-000

В этой главе обсуждаются правила техники безопасности, которым следует придерживаться во избежание

травм пользователей устройства и др. лиц, а также повреждения техники. Перед использованием устройства

ознакомьтесь с этой главой и придерживайтесь инструкций для надлежащей эксплуатации устройства. Не

выполняйте каких-либо действий, описание которых отсутствует в настоящем руководстве. Canon не несет

ответственность за любые повреждения, возникшие вследствие осуществления действий, не указанных в

настоящем руководстве, ненадлежащего использования устройства или проведения ремонтных работ и

внесения изменений третьими лицами и организациями, не являющимися представителями Canon или не

имеющих авторизацию компании Canon.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

2

background image

Установка

189L-001

Для безопасной и удобной эксплуатации устройства следует внимательно ознакомиться с приведенными ниже

мерами предосторожности и установить устройство в приемлемом для него месте.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с высоким риском возгорания или

поражения электрическим током.

Место, где будут закрыты вентиляционные отверстия

(слишком близко к стенам, кроватям, коврам или похожим объектам).

Влажное или запыленное помещение.

Место, подверженное воздействию прямого солнечного света, или на открытом воздухе.

Место, подверженное воздействию высоких температур.

Место вблизи открытого огня.

Рядом со спиртом, растворителями и другими легковоспламеняющимися веществами.

Прочие предупреждения

Не подсоединяйте к данному аппарату несертифицированные кабели. Несоблюдение этого

требования может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Не помещайте на аппарат браслеты и другие металлические предметы или емкости с водой. Контакт

посторонних веществ с электрическими компонентами внутри устройства может стать причиной

возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

При установке и удалении дополнительных аксессуаров убедитесь, что устройство выключено,

отсоедините штепсель шнура питания и отключите от устройства все интерфейсные кабели и шнур

питания. В противном случае шнур питания и интерфейсные кабели можно повредить, что может

стать причиной пожара или удара электротоком.

Не используйте данный аппарат рядом с любым медицинским оборудованием. Радиоволны,

излучаемые данным устройством, могут создавать помехи для работы медицинского оборудования,

что может привести к сбою оборудования и несчастному случаю с тяжкими последствиями.

Если в устройство попадают инородные вещества, отключите шнур питания от электрической

розетки и обратитесь к местному уполномоченному дилеру Canon.

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже

местах.

Устройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

Неустойчивая поверхность

Место, подверженное вибрации.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

3

background image

Прочие меры предосторожности

При перемещении данного устройства следуйте инструкциям, приведенным в настоящем

руководстве. При неправильном перемещении устройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

При установке устройства избегайте защемления рук между устройством и полом или стенами, а

также между лотками для бумаги. Это может привести к травмам.

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже местах, так как это может

привести к травме.

Место, подверженное резким перепадам температуры или

влажности

Места вблизи оборудования, создающего магнитные или

электромагнитные волны

Лаборатория или место, где происходят химические

реакции

Место, подверженное воздействию коррозионно-активных

или токсичных газов

Место, которое может деформироваться под действием

веса устройства или где устройство может осесть (ковер и

т. п.)

Избегайте мест установки с плохой вентиляцией.

Во время использования это устройство генерирует озон в малых объемах. Несмотря на различную

восприимчивость к озону его количество не является опасным. Наличие озона может стать ощутимым в

течение длительного использования, особенно в плохо проветриваемых помещениях. Рекомендуется

обеспечить надлежащую вентиляцию помещения, где работает устройство, c целью поддержания

благоприятной для работы среды. Также следует избегать мест, в которых люди наиболее подвержены

воздействию выбросов устройства.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с повышенной конденсацией

При интенсивном обогреве помещения, в котором установлено устройство, а также в случаях

перемещения устройства из среды с более прохладным или сухим воздухом в помещения с более

высокой температурой или повышенным уровнем влажности, внутри устройства могут образоваться

капли воды (конденсат). Использование устройства в подобных условиях может привести к замятию

бумаги, плохому качеству печати или повреждению устройства. Перед использованием устройство

должно не менее двух часов адаптироваться к окружающей температуре и влажности.

При использовании беспроводной локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

Устанавливайте устройство на расстоянии не более 50 м от беспроводного LAN-роутера.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте, где другие объекты могут препятствовать связи. Мощность

сигнала может значительно падать при прохождении через стены или полы.

Размещайте устройство как можно дальше от цифровых беспроводных телефонов, микроволновых

печей и другого оборудования, являющегося источником радиоволн.

На высоте 3 000 м над уровнем моря и выше

Устройства с жестким диском могут работать неправильно на высоте около 3 000 метров и больше над

уровнем моря.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

4

background image

Источник питания

189L-002

Это устройство поддерживает напряжение 220–240 В и частоту электрического тока 50/60 Гц.

Используйте только тот источник питания, который отвечает требованиям к напряжению.

Несоблюдение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим

током.

Не используйте другие шнуры питания, кроме шнура, входящего в комплект принтера, так как это

может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Предоставленный шнур питания предназначен для подключения данного устройства. Не используйте

его для подключения прочих устройств.

Не изменяйте, не тяните, не сгибайте и не деформируйте каким-либо иным ведущим к поломке

способом шнур питания. Не ставьте тяжелые предметы на шнур питания. Повреждение шнура

питания может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Не вставляйте штепсель шнура питания в розетку и не извлекайте его мокрыми руками — это может

привести к поражению электрическим током.

Не используйте удлинительные шнуры или удлинители с несколькими розетками с данным

устройством. Несоблюдение этого требования может привести к пожару или поражению

электрическим током.

Не сворачивайте шнур питания, не завязывайте его в узел, так как это может привести к пожару или

поражению электрическим током.

Вставляйте штепсель шнура питания в розетку сети переменного тока полностью. Несоблюдение

этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Полностью отсоединяйте штепсель шнура питания от розетки сети переменного тока во время грозы.

Невыполнение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания, поражения электрическим током

или повреждения устройства.

Установите данный аппарат возле сетевой розетки и оставьте достаточно места вокруг вилки питания,

чтобы ее можно было легко отсоединить в экстренном случае.

При подключении электропитания

Не подключайте устройство к источнику бесперебойного питания.

Если устройство подключается в розетку сети переменного тока с несколькими гнездами, не

используйте другие гнезда для подключения прочих устройств.

Не подключайте шнур питания к вспомогательной розетке на компьютере.

Прочие меры предосторожности

Электрические помехи могут привести к неполадкам в работе устройства или потере данных.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

5

background image

Обращение

189L-003

Незамедлительно отсоедините шнур питания от розетки и

обратитесь к уполномоченному дилеру Canon, если

устройство издает необычный шум, выделяет

непривычный запах или дым или чрезмерно нагревается.

Продолжение эксплуатации может стать причиной

возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Не разбирайте аппарат и не пытайтесь что-либо изменить в

его устройстве. Некоторые компоненты внутри устройства

сильно нагреваются или находятся под высоким

напряжением, что может стать причиной возгорания или

поражения электрическим током.

Размещайте устройство так, чтобы шнур питания и другие кабели, а также внутренние и

электрические компоненты находились вне досягаемости детей. Невыполнение этого условия может

привести к несчастным случаям.

Не распыляйте вблизи устройства легковоспламеняющиеся вещества. Контакт

легковоспламеняющихся веществ с электрическими компонентами внутри устройства может

привести к возгоранию или поражению электрическим током.

При перемещении устройства обязательно выключите переключатели питания и компьютера, затем

отсоедините штепсель шнура питания и интерфейсные кабели. В противном случае возможно

повреждение шнура питания или интерфейсных кабелей, что может привести к возгоранию или

поражению электрическим током.

Подсоединяя или отсоединяя кабель USB, когда штепсель кабеля питания вставлен в розетку сети

переменного тока, не прикасайтесь к металлической части гнезда, так как это может привести к

поражению электрическим током.

При использовании кардиостимулятора

Устройство создает слабое магнитное поле. Если вы используете кардиостимулятор и чувствуете

некоторые нарушения его работы, отойдите от устройства и немедленно обратитесь к врачу.

Не кладите на устройство тяжелые предметы, так как они могут упасть и привести к травме.

В целях безопасности выньте шнур питания из розетки, если устройство долгое время не будет

использоваться.

Будьте осторожны при открытии и закрытии крышек, чтобы не травмировать руки.

Избегайте контакта рук и одежды с валиками в области вывода. Попадание рук или одежды между

валиками может привести к получению травмы.

В процессе и сразу же после работы внутренние компоненты и область вокруг выводного лотка

устройства очень горячие. Не прикасайтесь к этим областям, чтобы не получить ожоги. Кроме того,

отпечатанная бумага сразу после вывода может быть горячей, поэтому обращайтесь с ней аккуратно.

В противном случае можно получить ожоги.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

6

background image

Если при копировании на стекле для документов размещена тяжелая книга, не давите на устройство

подачи или на стекло для документов с силой. Это может привести к повреждению стекла

экспонирования и травмам.

Следите за тем, чтобы не уронить на стекло экспонирования тяжелый предмет, например словарь.

Это может привести к повреждению стекла экспонирования и травмам.

Лазерное излучение

Проникновение лазерного излучения наружу и его контакт с глазами может нанести ущерб зрению.

При транспортировке устройства

Для предотвращения повреждения устройства во время транспортировки выполните следующее.

Извлеките картриджи с тонером.

Надежно упакуйте устройство в оригинальную коробку с упаковочными материалами.

Если беспокоит уровень шума

Если шум работы устройства беспокоит (в зависимости от условий эксплуатации и режима работы), то

рекомендуется установить устройство в месте, отличном от офиса.

Прочие меры предосторожности

Следуйте указаниям на наклейке с предупреждением, прикрепленной к устройству.

Избегайте тряски и ударов по устройству.

Не открывайте и не закрывайте дверцы, крышки и прочие компоненты с применением силы. Это

может привести к повреждению устройства.

Не прикасайтесь к контактам (

). Это может привести к повреждению устройства.

Не выключайте устройство в процессе печати. Не открывайте и не закрывайте крышку, а также не

загружайте и не вынимайте бумагу в процессе печати. В противном случае может произойти замятие

бумаги.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

7

background image

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры

189L-004

Выполняйте периодическую очистку устройства. При накоплении пыли устройство может работать

ненадлежащим образом. Во время очистки придерживайтесь следующих правил. При возникновении

неполадок в работе см. раздел 

Устранение неполадок(P. 349) 

. Если проблему невозможно устранить

самостоятельно и устройство необходимо осмотреть, ознакомьтесь с разделом 

Если проблему не удается

устранить(P. 385) 

.

Перед очисткой отключите питание и отсоедините шнур питания от розетки переменного тока.

Несоблюдение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим

током.

Периодически отсоединяйте шнур питания и очищайте штепсель сухой тканью для удаления пыли и

грязи. Накопившаяся пыль может поглощать влагу из воздуха, что может вызвать воспламенение при

контакте с электричеством.

Для очистки аппарата используйте влажную хорошо отжатую ткань. Смачивать ткань для очистки

необходимо только в воде. Не используйте спирт, бензин, растворители краски и другие

легковоспламеняющиеся вещества. Не используйте бумажные салфетки и полотенца. Если эти

вещества вступят в контакт с электрическими узлами внутри устройства, они могут привести к

возникновению статического электричества, или возгоранию, или поражению электрическим током.

Регулярно проверяйте отсутствие повреждений шнура питания и штепселя. Проверяйте отсутствие

коррозии, механической деформации, царапин, трещин или чрезмерного нагревания аппарата.

Использование оборудования, техническое обслуживание которого проводится

неудовлетворительно, может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Некоторые компоненты внутри аппарата сильно нагреваются или находятся под высоким

напряжением. Контакт с этими компонентами может привести к ожогам. Не прикасайтесь к частям

аппарата, не перечисленным в данном руководстве.

При загрузке бумаги или извлечении застрявшей бумаги или документов будьте осторожны, чтобы не

порезать руки о края бумаги.

При извлечении застрявшей бумаги или замене картриджа с тонером избегайте попадания тонера на

руки или одежду. При попадании тонера на руки или одежду немедленно промойте их холодной водой.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

8

background image

Расходные материалы

189L-005

Не бросайте отработанные картриджи с тонером в открытый огонь. Кроме того, не храните

картриджи с тонером и бумагу вблизи открытого огня. Это может вызвать возгорание тонера и

привести к ожогам или пожару.

При случайном рассыпании тонера осторожно соберите частички тонера или сотрите их мягкой

влажной тканью таким образом, не вдыхая его. Запрещается использовать для очистки

просыпанного тонера пылесос, не оснащенный специальным приспособлением для защиты от

взрыва пыли. В противном случае возможно повреждение пылесоса или взрыв пыли, вызванный

статическим разрядом.

При использовании кардиостимулятора

Картриджи с тонером создают слабое магнитное поле. Если вы используете кардиостимулятор и

чувствуете нарушения в его работе, отойдите от картриджей с тонером и немедленно обратитесь к

врачу.

Примите все меры предосторожности, чтобы не вдыхать тонер. Если вы вдохнули тонер, немедленно

обратитесь к врачу.

Примите все меры предосторожности, чтобы тонер не попал в глаза и рот. При попадании тонера в

глаза или рот немедленно промойте их холодной водой и обратитесь к врачу.

Примите все меры предосторожности, чтобы тонер не касался вашей кожи. В противном случае

смойте его холодной водой с использованием мыла. При появлении раздражения на коже

немедленно обратитесь к врачу.

Храните картриджи с тонером и другие расходные материалы в местах, недоступных для детей. В

случае проглатывания тонера немедленно обратитесь к врачу или в токсикологический центр.

Не разбирайте картридж с тонером и не пытайтесь что-либо изменить в его устройстве. Это может

привести к рассеиванию тонера.

Полностью извлеките защитную ленту из картриджа с тонером, не применяя силу. В противном

случае это может привести к рассеиванию тонера.

Обработка картриджа с тонером

Возьмите картридж с тонером как показано на рисунке. Не ставьте его вертикально и не

переворачивайте его вверх дном.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

9

background image

Не прикасайтесь к устройству памяти картриджа с тонером (

) и к электрическим контактам (

).

Не царапайте поверхность барабана (

) и не допускайте воздействия света на него.

Не извлекайте картридж с тонером из устройства или защитной упаковки без необходимости.

Картридж с тонером является магнитным продуктом. Не храните его рядом с гибкими дисками,

жесткими дисками и другими устройствами, на которые могут повлиять магнитные свойства

картриджа. Невыполнение этого условия может привести к потере данных.

Хранение картриджа с тонером

Для обеспечения безопасного и надлежащего использования храните в следующей среде.

Диапазон температур хранения: 0–35 °C

Диапазон влажности при хранении: от 35 до 85 % относительной влажности (без конденсации)

*

Храните картридж не открывая упаковки, откройте ее только перед самым использованием.

При извлечении картриджа с тонером из устройства поместите извлеченный картридж в исходный

защитный пакет или оберните его толстой тканью.

Не храните картридж в вертикальном или перевернутом состоянии. Это приведет к отвердеванию

тонера, и его исходная консистенция может не восстановиться даже после встряхивания.

*

 Даже при хранении в пределах допустимого диапазона влажности капли воды (конденсат) могут образовываться

внутри картриджа при разнице температур внутри и снаружи картриджа с тонером. Конденсация оказывает

негативное воздействие на качество картриджей с тонером.

Не храните картридж с тонером в перечисленных ниже местах:

Вблизи открытого огня;

В местах, подверженных воздействию прямого солнечного света или другого яркого света, более пяти

минут;

Важные указания по технике безопасности

10

background image

При повышенной концентрации солей в воздухе;

В местах, подверженных воздействию разъедающих газов (аэрозоли и аммиак);

Под воздействием высоких температур и повышенной влажности;

В местах с резкими перепадами температуры и влажности, приводящими к возникновению

конденсата;

Вблизи скоплений пыли;

В местах, доступных для детей;

Избегайте использования поддельных картриджей с тонером

В продаже встречаются картриджи с тонером, являющиеся подделками картриджей Canon.

Использование поддельных картриджей может привести к ухудшению качества печати или работы

устройства. Компания Canon не несет ответственности за какие-либо неполадки, несчастные случаи или

ущерб, являющиеся результатом использования поддельного картриджа с тонером.

Дополнительные сведения см. на веб-странице canon.com/counterfeit.

Ожидаемое время поступления запасных частей и картриджей с тонером

Запасные части и картриджи с тонером для устройства будут в продаже в течение минимум семи (7) лет

после снятия с производства данной модели устройства.

Упаковочные материалы картриджа тонера

Сохраните защитный пакет картриджа с тонером. Они понадобятся при транспортировке этого

устройства.

Количество, форма и размещение упаковочных материалов могут изменяться без предварительного

уведомления.

Утилизируйте защитную ленту в соответствии с местными правилами и нормами.

При утилизации использованного картриджа с тонером

Поместите картридж в защитный пакет, чтобы предотвратить просыпание тонера, а затем утилизируйте

картридж с тонером в соответствии с местными законами.

Важные указания по технике безопасности

11

Оглавление

Аннотации для Лазерного МФУ Canon i-SENSYS MF232w в формате PDF

Топ 10 инструкций

Другие инструкции

MF244dw / MF232w / MF231

Руководство пользователя

USRMA-1413-00 2016-09 ru Copyright CANON INC. 2016

Содержание

Важные указания по т

Установка ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 3

Источник питания ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Обращение ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8

Расходные материалы ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 9

ехнике безопасности …………………………………………………………. 2

Основные операции ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13

Компоненты и их функции ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15

Передняя сторона …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 16

Задняя сторона ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18

Внутренние детали …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 20

Отверстие для ручной подачи …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 21

Лоток для бумаги ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 22

Панель управления …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 23

Дисплей …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 30

Использование панели управления ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 34

Ввод текста ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 36

Размещение документов …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 39

Загрузка бумаги …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 43

Загрузка бумаги в лоток …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 45

Загрузка бумаги в отверстие для ручной подачи …………………………………………………………………………………… 48

Загрузка конвертов …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 50

Загрузка уже отпечатанной бумаги …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 52

Определение формата и типа бумаги ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 54

Регистрация специального формата бумаги ……………………………………………………………………………………. 56

Переход в бесшумный режим ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 58

Переход в спящий режим ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 60

Установка времени автоматического выключения ………………………………………………………………………………… 62

Копирование ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 64

Основные операции копирования ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 66

Отмена копирования ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 68

Различные настройки копирования ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 70

Увеличение или уменьшение ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 71

Выбор типа документа …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 72

Настройка плотности ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 73

Настройка резкости …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 74

Двустороннее копирование (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 76

Копирование нескольких документов на одном листе (2 на 1/4 на 1) …………………………………………………………. 78

Использование клавиши [Paper Save Copy] (MF244dw/MF231) …………………………………………………………………… 80

I

Копирование обеих сторон удостоверения личности на одной странице

Сортировка копий по страницам ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 84

Изменение параметров по умолчанию ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 85

…………………………………………………… 82

Использование аппарата в качестве принтера ……………………………………………….. 87

Печать с компьютера ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 88

Печать документа …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 89

Отмена печати ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 93

Проверка состояния печати ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 96

Различные параметры печати …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 97

Увеличение или уменьшение ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 99

Включение односторонней и двухсторонней печати (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………… 101

Сортировка распечаток по страницам …………………………………………………………………………………………. 103

Печать нескольких страниц на одном листе ………………………………………………………………………………….. 105

Печать плакатов ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 107

Печать буклетов (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 109

Печать кромок ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 111

Печать дат и номеров страниц …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 112

Печать водяных знаков …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 114

Выбор типа документа ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 116

Экономия тонера …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 118

Объединение и печать нескольких документов …………………………………………………………………………….. 120

Настройка параметров печати под потребности пользователя ………………………………………………………………. 124

Регистрация комбинаций часто используемых настроек печати ……………………………………………………….. 125

Изменение параметров по умолчанию ………………………………………………………………………………………… 127

Использование устройства в качестве сканера …………………………………………….. 130

Подготовка к использованию аппарата в качестве сканера (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………….. 132

Сканирование на аппарате ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 133

Сканирование с помощью клавиши [Scan -> PC] ………………………………………………………………………………….. 136

Сканирование на компьютере ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 140

Сканирование с помощью приложения …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 141

Настройки параметров сканирования в ScanGear MF ……………………………………………………………………………. 143

Удобное использование с мобильным устройством (MF244dw/

MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 145

Подключение к мобильному устройству ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 146

Прямое соединение (режим точки доступа) ………………………………………………………………………………………… 147

Оптимальное использование возможностей аппарата с помощью приложений ……………………………………… 150

Использование AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 151

Печать с помощью AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 156

Сканирование с помощью AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 159

Если не удается воспользоваться функцией AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………… 161

Использование Виртуального принтера Google ………………………………………………………………………………….. 162

Удаленное управление аппаратом ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 166

II

Сеть (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 168

Подключение к сети …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 169

Выбор проводной или беспроводной локальной сети ………………………………………………………………………….. 171

Подключение к проводной локальной сети ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 172

Подключение к беспроводной локальной сети ……………………………………………………………………………………. 173

Настройка подключения с помощью функции WPS (режим нажатия кнопки) ……………………………………….. 175

Настройка подключения с помощью функции WPS (режим PIN-кода) …………………………………………………. 178

Настройка подключения путем выбора беспроводного маршрутизатора ……………………………………………. 181

Настройка подключения путем детального задания параметров ………………………………………………………. 184

Проверка SSID и ключа сети ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 188

Настройка IP-адреса ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 191

Настройка адреса IPv4 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 192

Настройка адресов IPv6 …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 195

Просмотр параметров сети ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 199

Настройка аппарата для печати с помощью компьютера ……………………………………………………………………… 202

Настройка протоколов печати и функций WSD ……………………………………………………………………………………. 203

Настройка портов принтера ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 206

Настройка сервера печати ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 209

Настройка аппарата для сетевой среды ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 213

Настройка параметров Ethernet ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 214

Изменение максимального блока передачи ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 216

Настройка времени ожидания при подключении к сети ……………………………………………………………………….. 217

Настройка DNS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 218

Настройка SNTP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 222

Мониторинг и контроль аппарата с помощью SNMP ……………………………………………………………………………. 224

Безопасность ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 230

Защита аппарата от несанкционированного доступа ……………………………………………………………………………. 231

Предотвращение несанкционированного доступа ………………………………………………………………………………. 232

Настройка прав доступа …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 234

Настройка PIN-кода администратора системы ……………………………………………………………………………….. 235

Настройка PIN-кода для Удаленного ИП (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………………… 237

Ограничение связи посредством брандмауэров (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………….. 239

Указание IP-адресов по правилам брандмауэра …………………………………………………………………………….. 240

Указание MAC-адресов по правилам брандмауэра …………………………………………………………………………. 244

Изменение номеров портов (MF244dw/MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 247

Настройка прокси (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 249

Ограничение функций аппарата (MF244dw/MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………….. 251

Отключение соединения HTTP …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 252

Отключение Удаленного ИП ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 253

Реализация функций надежной защиты (MF244dw/MF232w) ………………………………………………………………….. 254

Включение функции шифрованной связи TLS для Удаленного ИП …………………………………………………………… 255

Настройка аутентификации IEEE 802.1X ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 258

Настройка параметров для пар ключей и цифровых сертификатов …………………………………………………………. 263

III

Создание пар ключей ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Использование пар ключей и цифровых сертификатов, выданных центром сертификации (СА) ………………. 272

Проверка пары ключей и цифровых сертификатов ………………………………………………………………………… 276

265

Использование Удаленного ИП (MF244dw/MF232w) …………………………………….. 279

Запуск Удаленного ИП ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 280

Экраны Удаленного ИП ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 282

Управление документами и проверка состояния аппарата ……………………………………………………………………. 285

Настройка параметров меню с помощью Удаленного ИП ………………………………………………………………………. 289

Список меню настройки ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 292

Прямое соединение (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 293

Настройки сети (MF244dw/MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 294

Вывод отчетов …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 305

Настройки ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 308

Настройки таймера ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 312

Общие настройки (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 317

Настройки копирования ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 319

Настройки сканирования ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 321

Настройки принтера …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 323

Настройка/Обслуживание …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 334

Настройки управления системой ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 340

Устранение неполадок ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 349

Устранение замятия бумаги ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 351

Если появляется сообщение об ошибке ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 357

Распространенные проблемы …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 365

Проблемы, связанные с установкой и настройкой ……………………………………………………………………………….. 366

Проблемы при копировании/печати ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 370

Печать выполняется неправильно ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 373

Неудовлетворительные результаты печати ………………………………………………………………………………………… 375

Скручивание или заламывание бумаги ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 381

Бумага подается неправильно …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 383

Если проблему не удается устранить …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 385

Обслуживание ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 387

Очистка аппарата …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 388

Корпус ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 389

Стекло экспонирования …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 390

Податчик (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 393

Узел фиксации ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 394

Внутренняя часть аппарата …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 395

Замена картриджей с тонером …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 397

Перед заменой картриджа с тонером ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 399

IV

Процедура замены картриджей с тонером ………………………………………………………………………………………….

Перемещение аппарата …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 404

Просмотр значения счетчика …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 406

Инициализация настроек ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 407

Инициализация меню ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 408

Инициализируйте счетчик отчета Eco (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………… 410

Инициализация всех данных/параметров ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 411

401

Приложение ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 413

Программное обеспечение сторонних производителей (MF244dw/MF232w) …………………………………………….. 414

Ключевые моменты функций …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 415

Забота об окружающей среде и экономия средств ……………………………………………………………………………….. 416

Повышение производительности …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 418

Применение в мире цифровых технологий ………………………………………………………………………………………… 420

Другие функции ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 422

Технические характеристики …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 424

Технические характеристики аппарата ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 425

Технические характеристики беспроводной локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w) ……………………………………….. 427

Тип документа ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 428

Область сканирования ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 429

Бумага ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 430

Технические характеристики копирования ………………………………………………………………………………………… 432

Технические характеристики сканера ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 433

Технические характеристики принтера ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 434

Расходные материалы ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 435

Руководства, входящие в комплект поставки устройства ……………………………………………………………………… 436

Использование Руководство пользователя …………………………………………………………………………………………. 437

Макет экрана Руководство пользователя …………………………………………………………………………………………… 438

Просмотр Руководство пользователя ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 442

Параметры дисплея, настраиваемые вручную ……………………………………………………………………………………. 443

Другое …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 444

Основные операции в среде Windows ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 445

Примечание ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 454

V

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Важные указания по технике
безопасности

Важные указания по технике безопасности …………………………………………………………………….

Установка ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3

Источник питания …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5

Обращение ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 8

Расходные материалы ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

2

1

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Важные указания по технике безопасности

189L-000

В э

той главе обсуждаются правила техники безопасности, которым следует придерживаться во избежание
травм пользователей устройства и др. лиц, а также повреждения техники. Перед использованием устройства
ознакомьтесь с этой главой и придерживайтесь инструкций для надлежащей эксплуатации устройства. Не
выполняйте каких-либо действий, описание которых отсутствует в настоящем руководстве. Canon не несет
ответственность за любые повреждения, возникшие вследствие осуществления действий, не указанных в
настоящем руководстве, ненадлежащего использования устройства или проведения ремонтных работ и
внесения изменений третьими лицами и организациями, не являющимися представителями Canon или не
имеющих авторизацию компании Canon.

2

Установка

Важные указания по технике безопасности

189L-001

Для безопасной и у
мерами предосторожности и установить устройство в приемлемом для него месте.

добной эксплуатации устройства следует внимательно ознакомиться с приведенными ниже

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с высоким риском возгорания или
пораж

Место, где будут закрыты вентиляционные отверстия

Влажное или запыленное помещение.

Место, подверженное воздействию прямого солнечного света, или на открытом воздухе.

Место, подверженное воздействию высоких температур.

Место вблизи открытого огня.

Рядом со спиртом, растворителями и другими легковоспламеняющимися веществами.

ения электрическим током.

(слишком близко к стенам, кроватям, коврам или похожим объектам).

Прочие предупреждения

Не подсоединяйте к данному аппарату несертифицированные кабели. Несоблюдение этого

требования может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Не помещайте на аппарат браслеты и другие металлические предметы или емкости с водой. Контакт

посторонних веществ с электрическими компонентами внутри устройства может стать причиной
возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

При установке и удалении дополнительных аксессуаров убедитесь, что устройство выключено,

отсоедините штепсель шнура питания и отключите от устройства все интерфейсные кабели и шнур
питания. В противном случае шнур питания и интерфейсные кабели можно повредить, что может
стать причиной пожара или удара электротоком.

Не используйте данный аппарат рядом с любым медицинским оборудованием. Радиоволны,

излучаемые данным устройством, могут создавать помехи для работы медицинского оборудования,
что может привести к сбою оборудования и несчастному случаю с тяжкими последствиями.

Если в устройство попадают инородные вещества, отключите шнур питания от электрической

розетки и обратитесь к местному уполномоченному дилеру Canon.

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже
местах.

стройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

У

Неустойчивая поверхность

Место, подверженное вибрации.

3

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Прочие меры предосторожности

При перемещении данног

руководстве. При неправильном перемещении устройство может упасть, что приведет к травме.

При установке устройства избегайте защемления рук между устройством и полом или стенами, а

также между лотками для бумаги. Это может привести к травмам.

о устройства следуйте инструкциям, приведенным в настоящем

Не устанавливайте устройство в указанных ниже местах, так как это может
привести к травме.

Мест

Места вблизи оборудования, создающего магнитные или

Лаборатория или место, где происходят химические

Место, подверженное воздействию коррозионно-активных

Место, которое может деформироваться под действием

о, подверженное резким перепадам температуры или

влажности

электромагнитные волны

реакции

или токсичных газов

веса устройства или где устройство может осесть (ковер и
т. п.)

Избегайте мест установки с плохой вентиляцией.

Во время использования э
восприимчивость к озону его количество не является опасным. Наличие озона может стать ощутимым в
течение длительного использования, особенно в плохо проветриваемых помещениях. Рекомендуется
обеспечить надлежащую вентиляцию помещения, где работает устройство, c целью поддержания
благоприятной для работы среды. Также следует избегать мест, в которых люди наиболее подвержены
воздействию выбросов устройства.

то устройство генерирует озон в малых объемах. Несмотря на различную

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте с повышенной конденсацией

При интенсивном обогреве помещения, в котором установлено устройство, а также в случаях
перемещения устройства из среды с более прохладным или сухим воздухом в помещения с более
высокой температурой или повышенным уровнем влажности, внутри устройства могут образоваться
капли воды (конденсат). Использование устройства в подобных условиях может привести к замятию
бумаги, плохому качеству печати или повреждению устройства. Перед использованием устройство
должно не менее двух часов адаптироваться к окружающей температуре и влажности.

При использовании беспроводной локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

Устанавливайте устройство на расстоянии не более 50 м от беспроводного LAN-роутера.

Не устанавливайте устройство в месте, где другие объекты могут препятствовать связи. Мощность

сигнала может значительно падать при прохождении через стены или полы.

Размещайте устройство как можно дальше от цифровых беспроводных телефонов, микроволновых

печей и другого оборудования, являющегося источником радиоволн.

На высоте 3 000 м над уровнем моря и выше

Устройства с жестким диском могут работать неправильно на высоте около 3 000 метров и больше над
уровнем моря.

4

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Источник питания

Эт

о устройство поддерживает напряжение 220–240 В и частоту электрического тока 50/60 Гц.

189L-002

Используйт

Несоблюдение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим
током.

Не используйте другие шнуры питания, кроме шнура, входящего в комплект принтера, так как это

может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Предоставленный шнур питания предназначен для подключения данного устройства. Не используйте

его для подключения прочих устройств.

Не изменяйте, не тяните, не сгибайте и не деформируйте каким-либо иным ведущим к поломке

способом шнур питания. Не ставьте тяжелые предметы на шнур питания. Повреждение шнура
питания может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

Не вставляйте штепсель шнура питания в розетку и не извлекайте его мокрыми руками — это может

привести к поражению электрическим током.

Не используйте удлинительные шнуры или удлинители с несколькими розетками с данным

устройством. Несоблюдение этого требования может привести к пожару или поражению
электрическим током.

Не сворачивайте шнур питания, не завязывайте его в узел, так как это может привести к пожару или

поражению электрическим током.

Вставляйте штепсель шнура питания в розетку сети переменного тока полностью. Несоблюдение

этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Полностью отсоединяйте штепсель шнура питания от розетки сети переменного тока во время грозы.

Невыполнение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания, поражения электрическим током
или повреждения устройства.

е только тот источник питания, который отвечает требованиям к напряжению.

Установите данный аппарат возле сетевой розетки и оставьте достаточно места вокруг вилки питания,
чт

обы ее можно было легко отсоединить в экстренном случае.

При подключении электропитания

Не подклю

Если устройство подключается в розетку сети переменного тока с несколькими гнездами, не

используйте другие гнезда для подключения прочих устройств.

Не подключайте шнур питания к вспомогательной розетке на компьютере.

чайте устройство к источнику бесперебойного питания.

Прочие меры предосторожности

Электрические помехи могут привести к неполадкам в работе устройства или потере данных.

5

Обращение

Важные указания по технике безопасности

189L-003

Незамедлит

обратитесь к уполномоченному дилеру Canon, если
устройство издает необычный шум, выделяет
непривычный запах или дым или чрезмерно нагревается.
Продолжение эксплуатации может стать причиной
возгорания или поражения электрическим током.

Не разбирайте аппарат и не пытайтесь что-либо изменить в

его устройстве. Некоторые компоненты внутри устройства
сильно нагреваются или находятся под высоким
напряжением, что может стать причиной возгорания или
поражения электрическим током.

Размещайт

электрические компоненты находились вне досягаемости детей. Невыполнение этого условия может
привести к несчастным случаям.

Не распыляйте вблизи устройства легковоспламеняющиеся вещества. Контакт

легковоспламеняющихся веществ с электрическими компонентами внутри устройства может
привести к возгоранию или поражению электрическим током.

При перемещении устройства обязательно выключите переключатели питания и компьютера, затем

отсоедините штепсель шнура питания и интерфейсные кабели. В противном случае возможно
повреждение шнура питания или интерфейсных кабелей, что может привести к возгоранию или
поражению электрическим током.

ельно отсоедините шнур питания от розетки и

е устройство так, чтобы шнур питания и другие кабели, а также внутренние и

Подсоединяя или отсоединяя кабель USB, когда штепсель кабеля питания вставлен в розетку сети

переменного тока, не прикасайтесь к металлической части гнезда, так как это может привести к
поражению электрическим током.

При использовании кардиостимулятора

У

стройство создает слабое магнитное поле. Если вы используете кардиостимулятор и чувствуете

некоторые нарушения его работы, отойдите от устройства и немедленно обратитесь к врачу.

Не кладит

В целях безопасности выньте шнур питания из розетки, если устройство долгое время не будет

использоваться.

Будьте осторожны при открытии и закрытии крышек, чтобы не травмировать руки.

Избегайте контакта рук и одежды с валиками в области вывода. Попадание рук или одежды между

валиками может привести к получению травмы.

В процессе и сразу же после работы внутренние компоненты и область вокруг выводного лотка

устройства очень горячие. Не прикасайтесь к этим областям, чтобы не получить ожоги. Кроме того,
отпечатанная бумага сразу после вывода может быть горячей, поэтому обращайтесь с ней аккуратно.
В противном случае можно получить ожоги.

е на устройство тяжелые предметы, так как они могут упасть и привести к травме.

6

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Если при к

подачи или на стекло для документов с силой. Это может привести к повреждению стекла
экспонирования и травмам.

Следите за тем, чтобы не уронить на стекло экспонирования тяжелый предмет, например словарь.

Это может привести к повреждению стекла экспонирования и травмам.

опировании на стекле для документов размещена тяжелая книга, не давите на устройство

Лазерное излучение

Проникновение лазерного излучения наружу и его контакт с глазами может нанести ущерб зрению.

При транспортировке устройства

Для предо

Извлеките картриджи с тонером.

Надежно упакуйте устройство в оригинальную коробку с упаковочными материалами.

твращения повреждения устройства во время транспортировки выполните следующее.

Если беспокоит уровень шума

Если шум работы устройства беспокоит (в зависимости от условий эксплуатации и режима работы), то

рекомендуется установить устройство в месте, отличном от офиса.

Прочие меры предосторожности

Следуйте указаниям на наклейке с предупреждением, прикрепленной к устройству.

Избегайте тряски и ударов по устройству.

Не открывайте и не закрывайте дверцы, крышки и прочие компоненты с применением силы. Это

может привести к повреждению устройства.

Не прикасайтесь к контактам (

Не выклю

загружайте и не вынимайте бумагу в процессе печати. В противном случае может произойти замятие
бумаги.

чайте устройство в процессе печати. Не открывайте и не закрывайте крышку, а также не

). Это может привести к повреждению устройства.

7

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Техническое обслуживание и осмотры

189L-004

Выполняйт
ненадлежащим образом. Во время очистки придерживайтесь следующих правил. При возникновении
неполадок в работе см. раздел
самостоятельно и устройство необходимо осмотреть, ознакомьтесь с разделом

устранить(P

Перед о

Периодически отсоединяйте шнур питания и очищайте штепсель сухой тканью для удаления пыли и

Для очистки аппарата используйте влажную хорошо отжатую ткань. Смачивать ткань для очистки

Регулярно проверяйте отсутствие повреждений шнура питания и штепселя. Проверяйте отсутствие

е периодическую очистку устройства. При накоплении пыли устройство может работать

Устранение неполадок(P. 349) . Если проблему невозмо

Если проблему не удается

. 385) .

чисткой отключите питание и отсоедините шнур питания от розетки переменного тока.
Несоблюдение этого правила может стать причиной возгорания или поражения электрическим
током.

грязи. Накопившаяся пыль может поглощать влагу из воздуха, что может вызвать воспламенение при
контакте с электричеством.

необходимо только в воде. Не используйте спирт, бензин, растворители краски и другие
легковоспламеняющиеся вещества. Не используйте бумажные салфетки и полотенца. Если эти
вещества вступят в контакт с электрическими узлами внутри устройства, они могут привести к
возникновению статического электричества, или возгоранию, или поражению электрическим током.

коррозии, механической деформации, царапин, трещин или чрезмерного нагревания аппарата.
Использование оборудования, техническое обслуживание которого проводится
неудовлетворительно, может привести к пожару или поражению электрическим током.

жно устранить

Нек

оторые компоненты внутри аппарата сильно нагреваются или находятся под высоким
напряжением. Контакт с этими компонентами может привести к ожогам. Не прикасайтесь к частям
аппарата, не перечисленным в данном руководстве.

При загрузке бумаги или устранении замятия будьте осторожны, чтобы не порезать руки о края

бумаги.

При извлечении застрявшей бумаги или замене картриджа с тонером избегайте попадания тонера на

уки или одежду. При попадании тонера на руки или одежду немедленно промойте их холодной водой.

р
Под действием горячей воды тонер может пристать к поверхности так, что его невозможно будет
удалить.

8

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Расходные материалы

189L-005

Не бросайт

картриджи с тонером и бумагу вблизи открытого огня. Это может вызвать возгорание тонера и
привести к ожогам или пожару.

При случайном рассыпании тонера осторожно соберите частички тонера или сотрите их мягкой

влажной тканью таким образом, не вдыхая его. Запрещается использовать для очистки
просыпанного тонера пылесос, не оснащенный специальным приспособлением для защиты от
взрыва пыли. В противном случае возможно повреждение пылесоса или взрыв пыли, вызванный
статическим разрядом.

е отработанные картриджи с тонером в открытый огонь. Кроме того, не храните

При использовании кардиостимулятора

Картриджи с тонером создают слабое магнитное поле. Если вы используете кардиостимулятор и
чувствуете нарушения в его работе, отойдите от картриджей с тонером и немедленно обратитесь к
врачу.

Примит

обратитесь к врачу.

Примите все меры предосторожности, чтобы тонер не попал в глаза и рот. При попадании тонера в

глаза или рот немедленно промойте их холодной водой и обратитесь к врачу.

е все меры предосторожности, чтобы не вдыхать тонер. Если вы вдохнули тонер, немедленно

Примите все меры предосторожности, чтобы тонер не касался вашей кожи. В противном случае

смойте его холодной водой с использованием мыла. При появлении раздражения на коже
немедленно обратитесь к врачу.

Храните картриджи с тонером и другие расходные материалы в местах, недоступных для детей. В

случае проглатывания тонера немедленно обратитесь к врачу или в токсикологический центр.

Не разбирайте картридж с тонером и не пытайтесь что-либо изменить в его устройстве. Это может

привести к рассеиванию тонера.

Полностью извлеките защитную ленту из картриджа с тонером, не применяя силу. В противном

случае это может привести к рассеиванию тонера.

Обработка картриджа с тонером

Возьмит

переворачивайте его вверх дном.

е картридж с тонером как показано на рисунке. Не ставьте его вертикально и не

9

Важные указания по технике безопасности

Не прикасайт

Не царапайт

есь к устройству памяти картриджа с тонером (

е поверхность барабана (

) и не допускайте воздействия света на него.

) и к электрическим контактам ( ).

Не извлекайт

е картридж с тонером из устройства или защитной упаковки без необходимости.

Картридж с тонером является магнитным продуктом. Не храните его рядом с гибкими дисками,

жесткими дисками и другими устройствами, на которые могут повлиять магнитные свойства
картриджа. Невыполнение этого условия может привести к потере данных.

Хранение картриджа с тонером

Для обеспечения безопасного и надлежащего использования храните в следующей среде.

Диапазон температур хранения: 0–35 °C
Диапазон влажности при хранении: от 35 до 85 % относительной влажности (без конденсации)

*

Храните картридж не открывая упаковки, откройте ее только перед самым использованием.

При извлечении картриджа с тонером из устройства поместите извлеченный картридж в исходный

защитный пакет или оберните его толстой тканью.

Не храните картридж в вертикальном или перевернутом состоянии. Это приведет к отвердеванию

тонера, и его исходная консистенция может не восстановиться даже после встряхивания.

*

Даже при хранении в пределах допустимого диапазона влажности капли воды (конденсат) могут образовываться
внутри картриджа при разнице температур внутри и снаружи картриджа с тонером. Конденсация оказывает
негативное воздействие на качество картриджей с тонером.

Не храните картридж с тонером в перечисленных ниже местах:

Вблизи открытого огня;

В местах, подверженных воздействию прямого солнечного света или другого яркого света, более пяти

минут;

10

Важные указания по технике безопасности

При повышенной к

В местах, подверженных воздействию разъедающих газов (аэрозоли и аммиак);

Под воздействием высоких температур и повышенной влажности;

В местах с резкими перепадами температуры и влажности, приводящими к возникновению

конденсата;

Вблизи скоплений пыли;

В местах, доступных для детей;

онцентрации солей в воздухе;

Избегайте использования поддельных картриджей с тонером

В продаже встречаются картриджи с тонером, являющиеся подделками картриджей Canon.
Использование поддельных картриджей может привести к ухудшению качества печати или работы
устройства. Компания Canon не несет ответственности за какие-либо неполадки, несчастные случаи или
ущерб, являющиеся результатом использования поддельного картриджа с тонером.

Дополнительные сведения см. на веб-странице canon.com/counterfeit.

Ожидаемое время поступления запасных частей и картриджей с тонером

Запасные части и картриджи с тонером для устройства будут в продаже в течение минимум семи (7) лет
после снятия с производства данной модели устройства.

Упаковочные материалы картриджа тонера

Сохраните защитный пакет картриджа с тонером. Они понадобятся при транспортировке этого

устройства.

Количество, форма и размещение упаковочных материалов могут изменяться без предварительного

уведомления.

Утилизируйте защитную ленту в соответствии с местными правилами и нормами.

При утилизации использованного картриджа с тонером

Поместите картридж в защитный пакет, чтобы предотвратить просыпание тонера, а затем утилизируйте
картридж с тонером в соответствии с местными законами.

11

Основные операции

Основные операции

Основные операции ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Компоненты и их функции ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 15

Передняя сторона ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 16

Задняя сторона …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 18

Внутренние детали ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 20

Отверстие для ручной подачи ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 21

Лоток для бумаги ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 22

Панель управления …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 23

Дисплей ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 30

Использование панели управления ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 34

Ввод текста …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 36

Размещение документов ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 39

Загрузка бумаги ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 43

Загрузка бумаги в лоток ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 45

Загрузка бумаги в отверстие для ручной подачи …………………………………………………………………………… 48

Загрузка конвертов ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 50

Загрузка уже отпечатанной бумаги ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 52

13

Определение формата и типа бумаги …………………………………………………………………………………………… 54

Регистрация специального формата бумаги …………………………………………………………………………… 56

Переход в бесшумный режим …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 58

Переход в спящий режим ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 60

Установка времени автоматического выключения ……………………………………………………………………….. 62

12

Основные операции

Основные операции

В э

той главе описываются основные операции, такие как использование панели управления или загрузка

бумаги и документов, которые часто выполняются для использования функций аппарата.

Компоненты и их функции

В этом разделе описываются внешние и внутренние компоненты устройства и их функции, а также
объясняется использование клавиш на панели управления и чтение информации на дисплее.

и их ф

ункции(P. 15)

Компоненты

189L-006

Использование панели управления

том разделе приводится описание действий при переключении дисплея и выборе элементов.

В э

Использование панели управления(P. 34)

Размещение документ

В этом разделе описан порядок размещения документов на стекле экспонирования или в податчике.

Размещение документов(P. 39)

ов

Загр

В этом разделе описывается загрузка бумаги в лоток и отверстие для ручной подачи.

бумаги(P

узка бумаги

. 43)

13

Загрузка

Основные операции

Перех

В этом разделе описывается процедура запуска бесшумного (тихого) режима с целью снижения уровня шума,
издаваемого устройством в ходе работы.

Перех

В этом разделе описан порядок настройки спящего режима.

од в бесшумный режим

Переход в бесшумный режим(P. 58)

од в спящий режим

Переход в спящий режим(P. 60)

становка времени автоматического выключения

У

В данном разделе приводится информация о том, как включить настройку <Время автоотключения>.

Установка времени автоматического выключения(P. 62)

14

Основные операции

Компоненты и их функции

189L-007

В э

том разделе описаны компоненты устройства (внешние, внутренние компоненты, а также компоненты на
передней и задней стороне) и их функции. Помимо описания компонентов устройства, используемых для таких
основных операций, как размещение документов, загрузка бумаги и замена картриджей с тонером, в этом
разделе также описываются клавиши на панели управления и дисплее. Ознакомьтесь с этим разделом, чтобы
получить сведения о надлежащем использовании устройства.

Передняя сторона(P. 16)
Задняя сторона(P. 18)
Внутренние детали(P. 20)
Отверстие для ручной подачи(P. 21)
Лоток для бумаги(P. 22)
Панель управления(P. 23)

15

Передняя сторона

MF244dw

Основные операции

189L-008

MF232w/MF231

Лоток податчика документов (MF244dw)

Откройт

е, чтобы загрузить исходный документ в податчик.

Размещение документов(P. 39)

Податчик (MF244dw)

Авт

оматически подает документы в устройство для сканирования. Если в податчик загружены два и

более листов, документы сканируются последовательно.

Размещение документов(P. 39)

Панель управления

На панели управления размещены клавиши, такие как цифровые клавиши, клавиша [Пуск], дисплей и
индикат
указать нужные параметры. Вы можете переместить ее вверх или вниз для удобства в управлении.
Панель управления(P. 23) Дисплей(P. 30)

оры состояния. На панели управления можно выполнить любую доступную операцию и

16

Основные операции

Выводной лоток

Напечатанная бумага помещает

ся в выводной лоток.

Ручки для перемещения

При перемещении устройства дер

житесь за ручки.

Перемещение аппарата(P. 404)

Переключатель питания

Служит для вклю
подождите как минимум 10 секунд, прежде чем включить его снова.

чения и выключения питания. Чтобы перезапустить устройство, отключите его и

Стопор бумаги

твращает дальнейшее движение бумаги на выходе.

Предо

Отверстие для ручной подачи

Загр

ужайте бумагу в отверстие для ручной подачи, если необходимо временно использовать тип

бумаги, отличающийся от загруженного в лоток для бумаги.

р

учной подачи(P. 48)

Загрузка бумаги в отверстие для

Кассета для бумаги

узите тип бумаги, который часто используется, в лоток для бумаги.

Загр

ток(P. 45)

ло

Загрузка бумаги в

Область сканирования (MF244dw)

Документы, загр
последующего сканирования.

уженные в податчик, автоматически передаются в область сканирования для

Стекло экспонирования

Поместит
экспонирования можно помещать толстые или переплетенные документы (например, книги), которые
нельзя загрузить в податчик.

е сюда документы для копирования или сканирования. У модели MF244dw на стекло

Размещение документов(P. 39)

Вентиляционные отверстия (MF244dw)

Воздух, нах
Обратите внимание, что размещение объектов перед вентиляционными отверстиями препятствует
вентиляции.

одящийся внутри устройства, выводится наружу для охлаждения внутренних компонентов.

Установка(P. 3)

Крышка стекла экспонирования (MF232w/MF231)

Откройт

документов(P. 39)

е крышку, чтобы поместить документы на стекло экспонирования.

Размещение

17

Задняя сторона

MF244dw

MF232w/MF231

Основные операции

189L-009

Табличка с техническими данными

На э

той табличке показан серийный номер, необходимый при предоставлении запросов об

устройстве.

Если проблему не удается устранить(P. 385)

Задняя крышка (MF244dw)

Откройт

е заднюю крышку для устранения замятия бумаги.

Устранение замятия бумаги(P. 351)

USB-порт

Служит для подсоединения кабеля USB
подключения см. в разделе Начало работы.

устройства(P. 436)

для подключения устройства к компьютеру. Описание шагов

Руководства, входящие в комплект поставки

Порт локальной сети (MF244dw/MF232w)

Подсоединит
локальной сети и т. д. Описание шагов подключения см. в разделе Начало работы.

одящие в комплект поставки устройства(P. 436)

вх

е кабель локальной сети при подключении устройства к проводному маршрутизатору

Руководства,

18

Основные операции

Гнездо питания

Служит для подклю

Руководства, входящие в комплект поставки устройства(P. 436)

чения шнура питания. Описание шагов подключения см. в разделе Начало работы.

19

Внутренние детали

Основные операции

189L-00A

Панель управления

Поднимит
Процедура замены картриджей с тонером(P. 401) Устранение замятия бумаги(P. 351)

е эту панель для замены картриджа с тонером или устранения замятия бумаги.

Крышка тонера

Откройт

замены кар

е эту крышку для замены картриджа с тонером или устранения замятия бумаги.

триджей с тонером(P. 401)

Направляющая выхода бумаги

Откройт

СЫЛКИ

С

Процедура замены картриджей с тонером(P. 401)

е эту направляющую для устранения замятия бумаги.

Процедура

Устранение замятия бумаги(P. 351)

Устранение замятия бумаги(P. 351)

20

Основные операции

Отверстие для ручной подачи

189L-00C

Крышка отверстия для ручной подачи

Откройт

е эту крышку для загрузки бумаги в отверстие для ручной подачи.

Направляющие для бумаги

Отрегу
чтобы бумага подавалась в устройство без перекосов.

ССЫЛКИ

Загрузка бумаги в отверстие для ручной подачи(P. 48)

лируйте направляющие для бумаги в точном соответствии с шириной загруженных листов,

21

Лоток для бумаги

Пылезащитная крышка

Откройт

е эту крышку для загрузки бумаги в лоток для бумаги.

Основные операции

189L-00E

Направляющие для бумаги

Отрегу
чтобы бумага подавалась в аппарат без перекосов.

ССЫЛКИ

Загрузка бумаги в лоток(P. 45)

лируйте направляющие для бумаги в точном соответствии с шириной загруженных листов,

22

Панель управления

MF244dw/MF231(P. 23)
MF232w(P. 26)

Основные операции

189L-00F

Клавиша [Меню]

Нажмит
<Настройки>.

е для определения большинства параметров аппарата, таких как <Настройки таймера> или

Список меню настройки(P. 292)

Клавиша [COPY/SCAN]

Служит для переклю

чения режимов копирования и сканирования.

23

Основные операции

Клавиша [Копирование ИД-карты]

Нажмит
идентификационной карточки в натуральную величину на одной стороне страницы.

обеих ст

е для перехода в режим для копирования обеих сторон водительских прав или любой другой

Копирование

орон удостоверения личности на одной странице(P. 82)

Дисплей

От

ображает экраны операций и состояния, относящиеся к копированию и прочим функциям, а также
экраны состояния устройства и сведений об ошибках. Кроме того, экран используется при
определении параметров устройства.

управления(P

. 34)

Дисплей(P. 30) Использование панели

Клавиша [Сброс]

Нажмит

е для отмены параметров и восстановления ранее указанных параметров.

Клавиша [ ]

При определении параметров нажмит

При вводе текста нажмите эту клавишу для перемещения курсора влево.

Нажмите эту клавишу для уменьшения значения таких параметров, как плотность при

сканировании, копировании и т. д.

е эту клавишу для возврата к предыдущему экрану.

Клавиша [ ]

При

При изменении значений параметров нажмите эту клавишу для увеличения значения.

определении параметров нажмите эту клавишу для выбора элемента, расположенного над

текущим элементом.

Клавиша [ ]

При определении параметров нажмит

При вводе текста нажмите эту клавишу для перемещения курсора вправо.

Нажмите эту клавишу для увеличения значения таких параметров, как плотность при

сканировании, копировании и т. д.

е эту клавишу для перехода к следующему экрану.

Клавиша [ ]

При определении параметров нажмите эту клавишу для выбора элемента, расположенного под

текущим элементом.

При изменении значений параметров нажмите эту клавишу для уменьшения значения.

Клавиша [Стереть]

Нажмит

е для удаления введенных значений и текста.

Клавиша [Назад]

Служит для возврата к предыдущему экрану
то параметры не применяются и выполняется возврат на предыдущий экран.

. Если нажать эту клавишу при определении параметров,

24

Loading…

MF244dw / MF232w / MF231

Users Guide

USRMA-1398-00 2016-10 en Copyright CANON INC. 2016

Contents

Important Safety Instructions …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 2

Installation …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3

Power Supply ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Handling ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6

Maintenance and Inspections …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8

Consumables ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 9

Basic Operations ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 13

Parts and Their Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 15

Front Side ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 16

Back Side ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 18

Interior ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 20

Manual Feed Slot ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 21

Paper Drawer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 22

Operation Panel ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 23

Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 30

Using the Operation Panel ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 33

Entering Text …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 35

Placing Documents ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 38

Loading Paper ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 42

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 44

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 47

Loading Envelopes ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 49

Loading Preprinted Paper …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 51

Specifying Paper Size and Type …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 53

Registering a Custom Paper Size …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 55

Entering Quiet Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 57

Entering Sleep Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 59

Setting Auto Shutdown Time ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 61

Copying ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 63

Basic Copy Operations …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 65

Canceling Copies ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 67

Various Copy Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 69

Enlarging or Reducing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 70

Selecting Document Type …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 71

Adjusting Density …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 72

Adjusting Sharpness …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 73

2-Sided Copying (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 75

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) ……………………………………………………………………….. 77

Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231) …………………………………………………………………………………. 79

I

Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page ………………………………………………………………………………………. 81

Collating Copies by Page ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 82

Changing Default Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 83

Using the Machine as a Printer …………………………………………………………………………………………. 85

Printing from a Computer ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 86

Printing a Document …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 87

Canceling Prints ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 91

Checking the Printing Status ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 94

Various Print Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 95

Enlarging or Reducing ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 97

Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………………………………. 99

Collating Printouts by Page ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 101

Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 103

Printing Posters ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 105

Printing Booklet (MF244dw) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 107

Printing Borders ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 109

Printing Dates and Page Numbers …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 110

Printing Watermarks ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 112

Selecting Document Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 114

Saving Toner ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 116

Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ……………………………………………………………………………………. 118

Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 122

Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings …………………………………………………………………. 123

Changing Default Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 125

Using the Machine as a Scanner ……………………………………………………………………………………… 128

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………. 129

Scanning from the Machine ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 130

Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 133

Scanning from a Computer …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 137

Scanning Using an Application …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 138

Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 140

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w) …… 142

Connecting to a Mobile Device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 143

Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) …………………………………………………………………………………………. 144

Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ……………………………………………………………………… 147

Using AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 148

Printing with AirPrint …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 153

Scanning with AirPrint ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 156

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 158

Using Google Cloud Print …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 159

Managing the Machine Remotely ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 163

II

Network (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………. 165

Connecting to a Network …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 166

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 168

Connecting to a Wired LAN ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 169

Connecting to a Wireless LAN …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 170

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode …………………………………………………………………………. 172

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode …………………………………………………………………………….. 174

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router …………………………………………………………………………. 177

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ………………………………………………………………………… 180

Checking the SSID and Network Key ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 184

Setting IP Addresses ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 187

Setting IPv4 Address ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 188

Setting IPv6 Addresses ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 191

Viewing Network Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 194

Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer ……………………………………………………………………………… 197

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ………………………………………………………………………………….. 198

Conguring Printer Ports ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 201

Setting Up Print Server …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 204

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment …………………………………………………………………………… 207

Conguring Ethernet Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 208

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 210

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network …………………………………………………………………………………….. 211

Conguring DNS ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 212

Conguring SNTP …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 216

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ………………………………………………………………………………… 218

Security ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 224

Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access …………………………………………………………………………………… 225

Preventing Unauthorized Access ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 226

Setting Access Privileges …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 228

Setting the System Manager PIN …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 229

Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 231

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………….. 233

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ………………………………………………………………………………………… 234

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules …………………………………………………………………………………….. 238

Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 241

Setting a Proxy (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 243

Restricting the Machine’s Functions (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………….. 245

Disabling HTTP Communication …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 246

Disabling Remote UI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 247

Implementing Robust Security Features (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………….. 248

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI ……………………………………………………………………….. 249

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 252

Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ………………………………………………………………………….. 257

III

Generating Key Pairs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 259

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ………………………………………………………………………………. 266

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 269

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………….. 272

Starting Remote UI …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 273

Remote UI Screens ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 275

Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status ……………………………………………………………………………. 278

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 282

Setting Menu List …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 285

Direct Connection (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 286

Network Settings (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 287

Output Reports ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 297

Preferences ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 300

Timer Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 303

Common Settings (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 308

Copy Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 310

Scan Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 312

Printer Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 314

Adjustment/Maintenance ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 324

System Management Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 330

Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 339

Clearing Jams …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 341

When an Error Message Appears …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 347

Common Problems ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 355

Installation/Settings Problems …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 356

Copy/Printing Problems …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 360

When You Cannot Print Properly ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 363

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 365

Paper Creases or Curls …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 370

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 372

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 374

Maintenance ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 376

Cleaning the Machine …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 377

Exterior ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 378

Platen Glass ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 379

Feeder (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 382

Fixing Assembly …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 383

Machine Interior …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 384

Replacing Toner Cartridges ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 386

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 388

IV

How to Replace Toner Cartridges ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 390

Relocating the Machine ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 393

Viewing the Counter Value …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 395

Initializing Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 396

Initializing Menu …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 397

Initialize Eco Report Counter (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 399

Initializing All Data/Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 400

Appendix ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 402

Third Party Software (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 403

Feature Highlights ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 404

Going Green and Saving Money …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 405

Improving Eciency ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 407

Going Digital …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 409

So Much More ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 411

Specications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 413

Machine Specications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 414

Wireless LAN Specications (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………. 416

Document Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 417

Scan Area ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 418

Paper ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 419

Copy Specications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 421

Scanner Specications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 422

Printer Specications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 423

Consumables …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 424

Manuals Included with the Machine ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 425

Using User’s Guide ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 426

Screen Layout of User’s Guide ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 427

Viewing User’s Guide ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 431

Manual Display Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 432

Others ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 433

Basic Windows Operations ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 434

Notice …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 443

V

Important Safety Instructions

Important Safety Instructions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 2

Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 3

Power Supply ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5

Handling …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6

Maintenance and Inspections ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8

Consumables ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9

Important Safety Instructions

1

Important Safety Instructions

15A8-000

The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine

and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do

not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting

from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party

authorized by Canon.

Important Safety Instructions

2

Installation

15A8-001

To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an

appropriate location.

Do not install in a location that may result in a re or electrical shock

A location where the ventilation slots are blocked

(too close to walls, beds, rugs, or similar objects)

A damp or dusty location

A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors

A location subject to high temperatures

A location exposed to open ames

Near alcohol, paint thinners or other ammable substances

Other warnings

Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a re or electrical shock.

Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers lled with liquid on the machine. If foreign

substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.

When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power

plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power

cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a re or electrical shock.

Do not use near any medical equipment. Radiowaves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical

equipment, which may cause a malfunction and result in serious accidents.

If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and

contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Do not install in the following locations

The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.

Unstable location

Location exposed to vibrations

Other cautions

When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting

in injury.

When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the oor or

walls, or between the paper drawers. Doing so may result in injury.

Important Safety Instructions

3

Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage

A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or

humidity

A location near equipment that generates magnetic or

electromagnetic waves

A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur

A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases

A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or

where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)

Avoid poorly ventilated locations

This machine generates a slight amount of ozone, etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone, etc.

may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone, etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long

production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room where the machine

operates be appropriately ventilated to maintain a comfortable working environment. Also avoid locations

where people would be exposed to emissions from the machine.

Do not install in a location where condensation occurs

Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed is

heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location. Using

the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the machine. Let

the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.

When using wireless LAN (MF244dw / MF232w)

Set the machine at a distance of 50 m or less from the wireless LAN router.

Do not set machine in a location where any object blocks communication. The signal may be degraded when

passing through walls or oors.

Keep the machine as far as possible from digital cordless phones, microwave ovens, or other equipment that

emit radio waves.

In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher

Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above

sea level, or higher.

Important Safety Instructions

4

Power Supply

15A8-002

This machine is compatible with voltages of 220 to 240 V, and electrical frequency of 50/60 Hz.

Use only a power supply that meets the specied voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a re

or electrical shock.

Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.

The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other

devices.

Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place

heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a re or electrical shock.

Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.

Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a re or

electrical shock.

Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.

Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a re or electrical

shock.

Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may

result in a re, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.

Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sucient space around the power plug so that it can be

unplugged easily in an emergency.

When connecting power

Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power source.

If plugging this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to

connect other devices.

Do not connect the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.

Other precautions

Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.

Important Safety Instructions

5

Handling

15A8-003

Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet

and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes

an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or

excessive heat. Continued use may result in a re or electrical

shock.

Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-

voltage and high-temperature components inside the machine

which may result in a re or electrical shock.

Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal

and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.

Do not use ammable sprays near this machine. If ammable substances come into contact with electrical

parts inside this machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.

When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then

unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface

cables, resulting in a re or electrical shock.

When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not

touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.

If you are using a cardiac pacemaker

This machine generates a low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please

move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.

For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.

Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.

Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,

this may result in personal injury.

The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact

with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use

caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.

Important Safety Instructions

6

When copying with a thick book placed on the platen glass, do not press the feeder or the platen glass cover

forcefully. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in injury.

Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary, on the platen glass. Doing so may damage the

platen glass and result in injury.

Laser beam

If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.

When transporting the machine

To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.

Remove the toner cartridges.

Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.

If the operating noise concerns you

Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is

recommended that the machine be Installed in a place other than the oce.

Other precautions

Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.

Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.

Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the

machine.

Do not touch the contacts ( ). Doing so may result in damage to the machine.

Do not turn OFF the machine during printing. Also, do not open and close the cover and do not remove or

insert paper during printing. Doing so can cause paper jams.

Important Safety Instructions

7

Maintenance and Inspections

15A8-004

Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to

observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting(P. 339) . If the problem cannot be

resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 374) .

Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so

may result in a re or electrical shock.

Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust

may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a re if it comes into contact with electricity.

Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use

alcohol, benzenes, paint thinners, or other ammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels.

If these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static

electricity or result in a re or electrical shock.

Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,

cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a re or electrical

shock.

The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components

may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.

When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the

paper.

When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or

clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm

water can cause toner to adhere and be impossible to remove.

Important Safety Instructions

8

Consumables

15A8-005

Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open ames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or paper in a

location exposed to open ames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or re.

If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a

soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have

safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the

vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.

If you are using a cardiac pacemaker

Toner cartridges generate a low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities,

please move away from toner cartridges and consult your physician immediately.

Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.

Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,

immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.

Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold

water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.

Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,

consult a physician or poison control center immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.

Remove the sealing tape of the toner cartridge completely without using excessive force. Doing otherwise

may cause the toner to scatter.

Handling the toner cartridge

Hold the toner cartridge correctly as shown. Do not stand it up or turn it upside-down.

Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ).

Important Safety Instructions

9

Do not scratch the drum surface ( ) or expose it to light.

Do not remove the toner cartridge from this machine or from the protective bag unnecessarily.

The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep it away from oppy disks, disk drives, and other devices that

can be affected by magnetism. Failure to do so may result in data loss.

Storing the toner cartridge

Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.

Storage temperature range: 0 to 35°C

Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*

Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.

When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge into

the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.

When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not

return to its original condition even if it is shaken.

* Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a

difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of

toner cartridges.

Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations

Locations exposed to open ames

Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more

Locations exposed to excessive salty air

Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)

Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity

Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur

Locations with a large amount of dust

Locations within the reach of children

Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges

Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner

cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any

malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.

For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.

Important Safety Instructions

10

Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges

The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after

production of this machine model has been discontinued.

Toner cartridge packing materials

Save the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.

The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.

Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.

When disposing of a used toner cartridge

Place the toner container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the

toner cartridge according to local regulations.

Important Safety Instructions

11

Basic Operations

Basic Operations …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13

Parts and Their Functions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 15

Front Side ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 16

Back Side …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 18

Interior ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 20

Manual Feed Slot ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 21

Paper Drawer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 22

Operation Panel ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 23

Display ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 30

Using the Operation Panel …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 33

Entering Text ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 35

Placing Documents ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 38

Loading Paper …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 42

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 44

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 47

Loading Envelopes ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 49

Loading Preprinted Paper ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 51

Specifying Paper Size and Type ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 53

Registering a Custom Paper Size ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 55

Entering Quiet Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 57

Entering Sleep Mode …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 59

Setting Auto Shutdown Time ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 61

Basic Operations

12

Basic Operations

15A8-006

This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper and

documents, that are frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys

on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 15)

Using the Operation Panel

This section describes how to toggle the display and select items. Using the Operation Panel(P. 33)

Placing Documents

This section describes how to place documents on the platen glass and in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 38)

Loading Paper

This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and manual feed slot. Loading Paper(P. 42)

Basic Operations

13

Entering Quiet Mode

This section describes how to place the machine in quiet mode to reduce operation sound. Entering Quiet

Mode(P. 57)

Entering Sleep Mode

This section describes how to set the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 59)

Setting Auto Shutdown Time

This section describes how to enable the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 61)

Basic Operations

14

Parts and Their Functions

15A8-007

This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In

addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as placing documents, loading paper,

and replacing the toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this

section for tips on how to use the machine properly.

Front Side(P. 16)

Back Side(P. 18)

Interior(P. 20)

Manual Feed Slot(P. 21)

Paper Drawer(P. 22)

Operation Panel(P. 23)

Basic Operations

15

Front Side

15A8-008

MF244dw

MF232w / MF231

Document feeder tray (MF244dw)

Open to load an original in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 38)

Feeder (MF244dw)

Automatically feeds documents into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets are loaded in the

feeder, documents can be scanned continuously. Placing Documents(P. 38)

Operation panel

The operation panel consists of keys such as the numeric keys and [Start] key, a display, and status indicators.

You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel. You can move it up or

down so it is easier to operate. Operation Panel(P. 23) Display(P. 30)

Basic Operations

16

Output tray

Printed paper is output to the output tray.

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 393)

Power switch

Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and

turn it back ON.

Paper stopper

Prevents paper that has been output after printing from falling.

Manual feed slot

Load the paper into the manual feed slot when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from

that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47)

Paper drawer

Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper

Drawer(P. 44)

Scanning area (MF244dw)

Documents loaded in the feeder are automatically fed to the scanning area for scanning.

Platen glass

Place documents to copy or scan here. For MF244dw, use the platen glass to place thick or bound documents

such as books when they cannot be loaded in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 38)

Ventilation slots (MF244dw)

Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in

front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)

Platen glass cover (MF232w / MF231)

Open to place documents on the platen glass. Placing Documents(P. 38)

Basic Operations

17

Back Side

15A8-009

MF244dw

MF232w / MF231

Rating label

The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a

Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 374)

Rear cover (MF244dw)

Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Jams(P. 341)

USB port

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer. For connection steps, see «Getting

Started». Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

LAN port (MF244dw / MF232w)

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. For connection steps, see

«Getting Started». Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

Basic Operations

18

Power socket

Connect the power cord. For connection steps, see «Getting Started». Manuals Included with the

Machine(P. 425)

Basic Operations

19

Interior

15A8-00A

Operation panel

Lift this panel to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams. How to Replace Toner

Cartridges(P. 390) Clearing Jams(P. 341)

Toner cover

Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams. How to Replace Toner

Cartridges(P. 390) Clearing Jams(P. 341)

Paper exit guide

Open this guide to clear paper jams. Clearing Jams(P. 341)

LINKS

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

Basic Operations

20

Manual Feed Slot

15A8-00C

Manual feed cover

Open this slot to load paper in the manual feed slot.

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47)

Basic Operations

21

Paper Drawer

15A8-00E

Dust cover

Open this cover to load paper in the paper drawer.

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44)

Basic Operations

22

Operation Panel

15A8-00F

MF244dw / MF231(P. 23)

MF232w(P. 26)

[Menu] key

Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine, such as <Timer Settings> or <Preferences>.

Setting Menu List(P. 285)

[COPY/SCAN] key

Press to switch the mode to copy or scan.

Basic Operations

23

[ID Card Copy] key

Press to enter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver‘s license or other ID card onto the

same side of a page at actual size. Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page(P. 81)

Display

Displays the operation and status screens for copying and other functions, as well as the status of the

machine and error information. Also, view the screen when specifying the settings of the machine.

Display(P. 30) Using the Operation Panel(P. 33)

[Reset] key

Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen.

When entering text, press to move the cursor to the left.

Press to decrease a setting value such as density for scanning, copying, etc.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item above the currently selected item.

When changing setting values, press to increase a value.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen.

When entering text, press to move the cursor to the right.

Press to increase a setting value such as density for scanning, copying, etc.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item below the currently selected item.

When changing setting values, press to decrease a value.

[Clear] key

Press to delete the entered numbers and text.

[Back] key

Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

[OK] key

Press to apply settings or specied details.

Basic Operations

24

[Status Monitor] key

Press to check the status of printing or copy to view the usage history. You can also check the status of the

machine, such as the paper size and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors

occurred. Display(P. 30)

[Paper Setting] key

Press to select the paper you want to use, or to set the size and type of paper loaded in the paper source.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 35)

[Stop] key

Press to cancel copying, scanning, and other operations.

[Energy Saver] key

Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 59)

[Scan -> PC] key

Press to send the scanned documents to the registered computer. Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC]

Key(P. 133)

[Paper Save Copy] key

Press to put the machine into paper save copy mode for copying multiple document pages reduced on a

single sheet. Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

[Quiet Mode] key

Press to put the machine into quiet mode. While in quiet mode this key is lit in green. Press the key again to

exit quiet mode. Entering Quiet Mode(P. 57)

[Error] indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

Wi-Fi indicator (MF244dw)

Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.

[Processing/Data] indicator

Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there are

documents waiting to be processed.

[Start] key

Press to scan or copy documents.

Basic Operations

25

[#] key

Press to enter symbols such as «@» or «/».

[*] key

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

[Menu] key

Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine, such as <Timer Settings> or <Preferences>.

Setting Menu List(P. 285)

[COPY/SCAN] key

Press to switch the mode to copy or scan.

Basic Operations

26

[ID Card Copy] key

Press to enter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver‘s license or other ID card onto the

same side of a page at actual size. Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page(P. 81)

Display

Displays the operation and status screens for copying and other functions, as well as the status of the

machine and error information. Also, view the screen when specifying the settings of the machine.

Display(P. 30) Using the Operation Panel(P. 33)

[Reset] key

Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen.

When entering text, press to move the cursor to the left.

Press to decrease a setting value such as density for scanning, copying, etc.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item above the currently selected item.

When changing setting values, press to increase a value.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen.

When entering text, press to move the cursor to the right.

Press to increase a setting value such as density for scanning, copying, etc.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item below the currently selected item.

When changing setting values, press to decrease a value.

[Clear] key

Press to delete the entered numbers and text.

[Back] key

Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

[OK] key

Press to apply settings or specied details.

Basic Operations

27

[Status Monitor] key

Press to check the status of printing or copy to view the usage history. You can also check the status of the

machine, such as the paper size and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors

occurred. Display(P. 30)

[Paper Setting] key

Press to select the paper you want to use, or to set the size and type of paper loaded in the paper source.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 35)

[Stop] key

Press to cancel copying, scanning, and other operations.

[Energy Saver] key

Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 59)

[Scan -> PC1]/[Scan -> PC2] key

Press to send the scanned documents to the registered computer for each key. Scanning Using the [Scan

-> PC] Key(P. 133)

[Quiet Mode] key

Press to put the machine into quiet mode. While in quiet mode this key is lit in green. Press the key again to

exit quiet mode. Entering Quiet Mode(P. 57)

[Error] indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

Wi-Fi indicator

Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.

[Processing/Data] indicator

Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there are

documents waiting to be processed.

[Start] key

Press to scan or copy documents.

[#] key

Press to enter symbols such as «@» or «/».

Basic Operations

28

[*] key

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

LINKS

Using the Operation Panel(P. 33)

Basic Operations

29

Display

15A8-00H

The display shows the screens for copying, scanning, and other functions, as well as the screens for specifying settings

for these functions. You can also check information such as error messages and communication status on the display.

Main Screen

When you press (COPY/SCAN) the main screen for the selected function is displayed. The copy main

screen is shown below as an example.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Using the Machine as a Scanner(P. 128)

<Paper Settings> Screen

When you press (Paper Setting) to select the paper to copy or print on, the <Paper Settings> screen is

displayed. Select the paper on the screen. Also, for example, you can press this key to change the paper settings

when you load a paper size that is different from the previously loaded paper size. Note that the paper setting

must be correctly specied so that the paper is fed properly.

Selecting Paper Tray

Use to select the paper for each tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

<Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>

You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen.

<Menu> Screen

When you press , the <Menu> screen is displayed. On this screen, you can start specifying general machine

settings such as <Preferences> or <Timer Settings>, as well as many of the settings for each function, such as

copy and scan.

Basic Operations

30

Setting Menu List(P. 285)

<Status Monitor> Screen

When you press , a screen is displayed that enables you to check the status of documents that are being

printed or copied, as well as the status of the machine (amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.) and the

network setting information such as the IP address of the machine.

<Error Information/Notication>

Displays the details of any errors that occurred. When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

<Device Information>

Displays the status of the machine, such as the paper size or the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.

<Paper Information>

Displays the paper size specied in each paper source.

<Cartridge Level>

Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their

lifetime before the toner runs out.

<Check Counter>

Displays the totals for printouts. Viewing the Counter Value(P. 395)

Basic Operations

31

Status of copy/print jobs

Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Copy Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.

<Network Information> (MF244dw / MF232w)

Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of

wireless LAN communications.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

When a Message Is Displayed

Messages are displayed at the top of the screen in situations such as when end of toner cartridge lifetime is

reached or when a cover is left open. The display alternates between showing the normal screen and the

message.

When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

When an Error Occurs

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-

screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an

example ( When an Error Message Appears(P. 347) ).

LINKS

Using the Operation Panel(P. 33)

Basic Operations

32

Using the Operation Panel

15A8-00J

Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.

Using /

Scrolling the screen

The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If

the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are

inverted when it is selected.

Changing a setting value

Use / when entering numbers. You can also enter the value directly using the numeric keys when the

numeric key icon is displayed in the top-left corner of the screen, as shown below. Entering Text(P. 35)

The numbers in parentheses beneath the value input eld indicate the range of possible values.

Using /

Proceeding to next screen/Returning to previous screen

Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.

Basic Operations

33

You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing

.

Adjusting a setting value

Use / when adjusting the value on a scale.

Using

Press to apply a setting.

Using the Numeric Keys

Use the numeric keys when entering text and numbers. Entering Text(P. 35)

You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or display language:

Display Settings(P. 300)

To change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied length of

time:

Function After Auto Reset(P. 306)

Basic Operations

34

Entering Text

15A8-00K

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.

Switching the Type of Text

Press to switch the type of text that is entered. The currently selected type of text is indicated by the «A»,

«a», or «12» of <Entry Mode>.

You can also select <Entry Mode> and press to switch the type of text.

Types of Text That Can Be Entered

The text that can be entered using the numeric keys and are listed below.

Key A a 12

@ . — _ / 1

ABC abc 2

DEF def 3

GHI ghi 4

Basic Operations

35

JKL jkl 5

MNO mno 6

PQRS pqrs 7

TUV tuv 8

WXYZ wxyz 9

(Not available) 0

(space) — . * # ! » , ; : ^ ` _ = / | ‘ ? $ @ % & + \ ~ ( ) [ ] { } < > (Not available)

Press or select <Symbol> and press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to

display a screen for selecting symbols. Use the / / / keys to select the symbol to enter, and

press .

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.

Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Press or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press .

Example of Entering Text and Numbers

Example: «Canon-1»

1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.

2Press repeatedly until the letter «C» is selected.

3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.

4Press repeatedly until the letter «a» is selected.

5Press repeatedly until the letter «n» is selected.

6Press repeatedly until the letter «o» is selected.

7Press repeatedly until the letter «n» is selected.

8Press repeatedly until the symbol «-» is selected.

Basic Operations

36

9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.

10 Press .

11 Press / to highlight <Apply>, and then press .

Basic Operations

37

Placing Documents

15A8-00L

Place documents on the platen glass or in the feeder (MF244dw). Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound

documents such as books. You can load two or more sheets of documents in the feeder so that they can be scanned

continuously. For information about the types of documents that can be placed on the platen glass or in the feeder,

and information about the scannable area of a document, see Document Type(P. 417) or Scan Area(P. 418) .

Placing Documents on the Platen Glass(P. 38)

Placing Documents in the Feeder (MF244dw)(P. 39)

Use documents that are completely dry

When placing documents, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the documents has completely

dried.

To avoid paper jams (MF244dw)

Do not place the following types of documents in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:

Wrinkled or creased paper

Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper

Curled or rolled paper

Coated paper

Torn paper

Onion skin or thin paper

Stapled or clipped documents

Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

Transparencies

To scan documents more accurately (MF244dw)

Documents placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, documents

placed on the platen glass remain in a xed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate scanning

results, placing documents on the platen glass is recommended.

To scan tracing paper or transparencies (MF244dw)

To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.

Placing Documents on the Platen Glass

1Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.

Basic Operations

38

2Place the document face down on the platen glass.

Align the corner of the document with the top-left corner of the platen glass.

To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white

paper.

3Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

The machine is ready to scan the document.

When scanning is complete, remove the document from the platen glass.

Placing Documents in the Feeder (MF244dw)

1Open the document feeder tray.

Basic Operations

39

2Spread the document guides apart.

Slide the document guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual document width.

3Fan the document stack and align the edges.

Fan the document stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a at surface a

few times.

4Place the document(s) face up in the feeder.

Make sure that the document stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ).

Do not load documents of various sizes at the same time.

Up to 35 sheets can be loaded at a time. If 35 or more sheets are loaded, scanning may stop or a paper

jam may occur.

5Align the document guides against the edges of the document.

Slide the document guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the document.

Basic Operations

40

The machine is ready to scan the document.

Align the document guides securely against the edges of the document

Document guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.

While documents are being scanned

Do not add or remove documents.

When scanning is complete

Remove the scanned documents from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.

Basic Operations

41

Loading Paper

15A8-00R

You can load the paper into the paper drawer or manual feed slot. Load the paper you usually use into the paper

drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the manual feed slot when you

temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Paper(P. 419) for available paper

sizes.

Paper Type and Setting for the Machine

See the table below to specify the paper settings according to the type and weight of the paper to load into the

paper source. For more information about how to specify the paper settings on the machine, see Specifying

Paper Size and Type(P. 53) . For the amount of paper that can be loaded in each paper source, see

Paper(P. 419) .

Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Setting

on the Machine

Plain paper 60 to 89 g/m²

<Plain (60-89 g/m²)>

<Plain L (60-89 g/m²)>*

Recycled paper 60 to 89 g/m² <Recycled (60-89 g/m²)>

Color paper 60 to 89 g/m² <Color (60-89 g/m²)>

Heavy paper

90 to 120 g/m² <Heavy 1 (90-120 g/m²)>

121 to 163 g/m² <Heavy 2 (121-163 g/m²)>

Bond paper

60 to 90 g/m² <Bond 1 (60-90 g/m²)>

91 to 120 g/m² <Bond 2 (91-120 g/m²)>

121 to 163 g/m² <Bond 3 (121-163 g/m²)>

Envelope <Envelope>

Label <Labels>

Index card <Index Card>

* If set to <Plain (60-89 g/m²)> and that printout is curled, specify <Plain L (60-89 g/m²)> and print again.

Do not use the following types of paper:

Wrinkled or creased paper

Curled or rolled paper

Torn paper

Damp paper

Basic Operations

42

Very thin paper

Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

Highly textured paper

Glossy paper

Paper handling and storage

Store the paper on a at surface.

Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.

Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.

Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper.

Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic

changes in temperature or humidity.

When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture

Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form on the back side of the

operation panel or around the paper output area. There is nothing unusual about any of these

occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing toner on the paper causes moisture in the

paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room temperatures).

LINKS

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 55)

Basic Operations

43

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer

15A8-00S

Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the

paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47)

Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation

Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.

1Lift the dust cover.

2Slide the paper guides apart.

Size abbreviations on the paper guides

The abbreviations on the paper guides in the paper drawer indicate paper sizes as follows:

LGL: Legal

LTR: Letter

STMT: Statement

Basic Operations

44

EXEC: Executive

3Insert the paper into the paper drawer until the paper stops.

Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up.

Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.

Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.

When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is

displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 301)

Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper

Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ). Loading too much paper can cause

paper jams.

When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 49) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 51) .

4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

Move the paper guides in so they are exactly the width of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

Basic Operations

45

5Lower the dust cover.

When Legal size paper is loaded

The paper guides at the rear edge of the paper will be extended. Open the dust cover extension, then lower

the dust cover.

6Pull out the paper stopper to open.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

When changing the paper size or type

The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain (60-89 g/m²)>, respectively. If you

load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not

change the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

manual feed slot ( Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47) ), with the side to print face up (previously

printed side face down).

Load one sheet at a time per each print.

You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

If you are using A5 paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Paper(P. 419)

Basic Operations

46

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot

15A8-00U

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Load

the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44)

Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation

Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.

1Open the manual feed cover.

2Spread the paper guides apart.

Slide the paper guides outward.

3Insert the paper into the manual feed slot until the paper stops.

Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up.

Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.

When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is

displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 301)

Basic Operations

47

When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 49) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 51) .

4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

5Pull out the paper stopper to open.

Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Basic Operations

48

Loading Envelopes

15A8-00W

Make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes

and which side is face up.

Before Loading Envelopes(P. 49)

Loaded Orientation(P. 50)

This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you need

to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the

paper drawer or manual feed slot, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44) or Loading Paper in

the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47) .

Before Loading Envelopes

Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.

Only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow steps 1 to 4 in the procedure below

to prepare the envelope for loading.

1Close the ap of each envelope.

2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed

tightly.

3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.

Basic Operations

49

4Align the edges of the envelope on a at surface.

Loaded Orientation

Load the envelopes in portrait orientation, short edge rst, with the non-glued side (front side) face up.

Load envelopes in the same orientation for both the paper drawer and manual feed slot.

Load the envelopes so that their aps are at the left.

Basic Operations

50

Loading Preprinted Paper

15A8-00X

When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.

Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 51)

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF244dw)(P. 52)

This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a

description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot, see Loading

Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44) or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47) .

Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.

Load only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot each time you print.

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

Basic Operations

51

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF244dw)

Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting (MF244dw)

When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you perform

1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>, the facing

that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be used for 1-sided

printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Switch

Paper Feed Method(P. 308)

Basic Operations

52

Specifying Paper Size and Type

15A8-00Y

You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper

settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.

If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.

1Press (Paper Setting).

2Use / to select <MP Tray> or <Drawer 1>, and press .

3Select the loaded paper size, and press .

If the loaded paper size is not displayed, use / to select <Other Sizes>, and press .

4Select the loaded paper type, and press .

When a frequently used paper size is known

You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen.

1Press (Paper Setting).

2Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>, and press .

3Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> or <Drawer 1>, and press .

Basic Operations

53

4Select a frequently used paper size and press to checkmark it.

Uncheckmarked paper sizes are displayed in the <Paper Size (Other Sz.)> screen.

5Select <Apply>, and press .

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44)

Paper(P. 419)

Basic Operations

54

Registering a Custom Paper Size

15A8-010

You can register one frequently used custom paper size each for the paper drawer and manual feed slot.

1Press (Paper Setting).

2Use / to select <MP Tray> or <Drawer 1>, and press .

3Select <Custom>, and press .

4Specify the paper size.

1Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.

Select <X>, and press .

Input the length of the <X> side using / or the numeric keys, and press .

2Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.

Select <Y>, and press .

Input the length of the <Y> side, and press .

Basic Operations

55

3Select <Apply>, and press .

5Select the paper type, and press .

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44)

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47)

Basic Operations

56

Entering Quiet Mode

15A8-011

The quiet mode function reduces the operation sound of the machine. For example, when using the machine at night,

press on the operation panel. With only this operation, you can easily minimize operation sound. You can also

specify a time for the machine to automatically enter quiet mode.

When in quiet mode

When the machine enters quiet mode, lights up green.

When quiet mode is enabled

The operation of functions becomes slower.

When the machine cannot enter quiet mode

The machine is in Special Printing Mode

A particular paper size or paper type is specied

Specifying a time for the machine to enter quiet mode

You can specify a time for the machine to enter or exit quiet mode automatically. For example, this is useful

when wanting to reduce operation noise only for late-night operation.

<Timer Settings> <Quiet Mode Time> Specify each setting

<Apply>

Basic Operations

57

<Start Time>

Specify a time for entering quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.

<End Time>

Specify a time for exiting quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.

Exiting Quiet Mode

Press to exit quiet mode.

Basic Operations

58

Entering Sleep Mode

15A8-012

The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the

operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can

save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to

automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time.

When in sleep mode

When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up green.

Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode

When the machine is in operation

When the [Processing/Data] indicator is lit up or blinking

When documents are placed in the feeder

When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning

When a paper jam occurs

When the menu screen is displayed

When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes

enters sleep mode when error messages are displayed.)

When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection

When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer

The factory default settings for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode are

listed below. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. If you want to change

the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode, follow the procedure below.

1 minute (setting range is 1 to 30 minutes)

<Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that

elapses before the machine automatically enters sleep mode

Basic Operations

59

Exiting Sleep Mode

Press . You can also press any key other than to exit sleep mode.

Basic Operations

60

Setting Auto Shutdown Time

15A8-013

By enabling this setting, you can set the machine to automatically shut down. The machine automatically turns OFF

after the specied period of idle time has elapsed since entering the sleep mode. You can cut electric power

consumption at night and on holidays if you forget to turn OFF the machine.

<Timer Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Set the time

period

NOTE

The default setting is 4 hours.

MF244dw / MF232w users: If any setting of the [Timer Settings] is changed from the Remote UI while

the machine is in the sleep mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the

beginning. The machine automatically shuts down after the specied period of idle time has elapsed

since the timer was reset.

Basic Operations

61

Copying

Copying ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 63

Basic Copy Operations ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 65

Canceling Copies ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 67

Various Copy Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 69

Enlarging or Reducing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 70

Selecting Document Type ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 71

Adjusting Density …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 72

Adjusting Sharpness ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 73

2-Sided Copying (MF244dw) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 75

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) ………………………………………………………………. 77

Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231) ………………………………………………………………………… 79

Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page ………………………………………………………………………………. 81

Collating Copies by Page ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 82

Changing Default Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 83

Copying

62

Copying

15A8-014

This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful copy functions, such as copying several pages

onto a single sheet.

Using Basic Operations

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Canceling Copies(P. 67)

Using Copy Settings to Suit Your Needs

Enlarging or Reducing(P. 70) Collating Copies by Page(P. 82) Selecting Document

Type(P. 71)

Adjusting Density(P. 72) Adjusting Sharpness(P. 73) 2-Sided Copying (MF244dw)

(P. 75)

Copying

63

Copying Multiple Documents

onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)

(P. 77)

Using the [Paper Save Copy]

Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

Copying Both Sides of an ID

Card onto One Page(P. 81)

Simplifying Your Frequent Copy Operations

Changing Default Settings(P. 83)

Copying

64

Basic Copy Operations

15A8-015

1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 38)

2Press (COPY/SCAN) to switch to the Copy mode screen.

3Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys.

Enter a quantity from 1 to 999.

Press to cancel the entered quantity.

4Specify the copy settings as necessary.

Use / to select the settings. Various Copy Settings(P. 69)

5Press .

Copying starts.

If you want to cancel copying, press <Yes> . Canceling Copies(P. 67)

When placing documents in the feeder in step 1 (MF244dw)

The document is automatically scanned.

Copying

65

When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1

Depending on the copy settings you made, a screen for selecting the document size is displayed after you press

[ ]. Follow the procedure below.

1Select the document size, and press .

2Place the next document on the platen glass, and press .

Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entire document.

3Select <Start Copying>, and press .

When the <Size/Settings Mismatch> message appears.

When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

When copying documents with text or images that extend to the edges of the page

The edges of the document might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Scan

Area(P. 418) .

If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 83)

Copying

66

Canceling Copies

15A8-016

If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing , select <Cancel> and press , or press on the

operation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.

Canceling in the Screen That is Displayed While Copying

<Cancel> <Yes>

Press to Cancel

<Yes>

Use to Cancel

<Copy Job Status> <Cancel> <Yes>

Copying

67

<Cancel>

Cancels copying.

Copy details

The number of copies, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without

canceling copying, press to return to the copy main screen.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying

68

Various Copy Settings

15A8-017

A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, such as when you want to save paper or make your documents

easier to read.

Enlarging or Reducing(P. 70) Selecting Document

Type(P. 71)

Adjusting Density(P. 72)

Adjusting Sharpness(P. 73) 2-Sided Copying (MF244dw)

(P. 75)

Copying Multiple Documents

onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)

(P. 77)

Using the [Paper Save Copy]

Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

Copying Both Sides of an ID

Card onto One Page(P. 81)

Collating Copies by Page(P. 82)

Copying

69

Enlarging or Reducing

15A8-018

You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <A5->A4>, or

by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1%.

(COPY/SCAN) <Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio

<Custom Ratio>

Use / or the numeric keys to enter the copy ratio, and press . You can set any copy ratio from

25% to 400% in 1% increments.

Preset copy ratio

Select a copy ratio.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying

70

Selecting Document Type

15A8-019

You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the document

type, such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine

photos.

(COPY/SCAN) <Original Type> Select the document type

<Text>

Suitable when copying documents that only contain text.

<Text/Photo (High Speed)>

Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos. Priority is given to speed over image

quality.

<Text/Photo>

Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos.

<Photo>

Suitable when copying documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.

If <Text/Photo (High Speed)>, <Text/Photo>, or <Photo> is selected and <Density> is set to <Auto Density>, it

changes to Manual Density.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying

71

Adjusting Density

15A8-01A

You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in a document are too

light or dark. You can also automatically set an optimal density for a document.

(COPY/SCAN) <Density> Adjust the density

<Auto Density>

An optimal density for the document is automatically set.

<Original Type> is automatically set to <Text>. ( Selecting Document Type(P. 71) )

<Manual Density>

Use / to adjust the density.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Adjusting Sharpness(P. 73)

Correct Density(P. 311)

Copying

72

Adjusting Sharpness

15A8-01C

You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos.

(COPY/SCAN) <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness

<->: Press

Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

<+>: Press

Increases the image sharpness.

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Copying

73

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Adjusting Density(P. 72)

Copying

74

2-Sided Copying

15A8-01E

You can copy two pages of a document on both sides of the paper.

<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.

Paper(P. 419)

<2-Sided> is not available when using <Paper Save Copy> or <ID Card Copy>.

Using enables you to combine 2-sided copying and <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>: Using the [Paper Save

Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

(COPY/SCAN) <2-Sided> Select the type of 2-sided copying

Types of 2-sided copying

The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.

1-Sided->2-Sided

<Original/Finishing Type>

Specify if you want to change the binding, such as when copying book-type documents in calendar-type

format.

1-Sided->2-Sided

If you want to copy portrait-oriented documents in calendar-type format (short-edge binding)

Copying

75

<Original/Finishing Type> <1->2-Sided> <Portrait> <Calendar

Type>

If you want to copy landscape-oriented documents in book-type format (short-edge binding)

<Original/Finishing Type> <1->2-Sided> <Landscape> <Book

Type>

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 77)

Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

Copying

76

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4

on 1)

15A8-01F

You can copy two or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size. This

decreases the number of pages, enabling you to save paper.

Using <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You

can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might not

be copied if you increase it.

<2 on 1>/<4 on 1> is not available when using <Paper Save Copy> or <ID Card Copy>.

When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

Using enables you to combine 2-sided copying and <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> Using the [Paper Save

Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

(COPY/SCAN) <N on 1> Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> Select the

document size on the <Scan Size> screen

<2 on 1>/<4 on 1>

Select <2 on 1> to copy two pages of documents onto a single sheet, or select <4 on 1> to copy four pages of

documents onto a single sheet.

<Select Layout>

Specify how to arrange the documents on the page.

Copying

77

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

2-Sided Copying (MF244dw)(P. 75)

Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

Copying

78

Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key

15A8-01H

You can use <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> to copy multiple documents onto a single sheet, and

<2-Sided> to copy the document onto both sides of a page. Using , which

combines these functions, makes it easier to save paper than when using the

functions separately.

The 2-sided <Paper Save Copy> settings may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.

Paper(P. 419)

Using <Paper Save Copy> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen).

You can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might

not be copied if you increase it.

<Paper Save Copy> is not available when using <2-Sided>, <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> or <ID Card Copy>.

When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

Select the paper save copy setting Select the document size on the <Scan

Size> screen

Paper save copy settings

Select one of four setting combinations.

Original (Portrait) Copy

<2 on 1 1->2-Sided>*

<4 on 1 1->2-Sided>*

Copying

79

<2 on 1 1->1-Sided>

<4 on 1 1->1-Sided>

* MF244dw Only

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

2-Sided Copying (MF244dw)(P. 75)

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 77)

Copying

80

Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page

15A8-01J

You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of

a page. This function is useful when copying a driver’s license or ID card.

All regular paper sizes can be used except Letter (Government), Legal (Government), and Envelope.

<Copy Ratio> is automatically set to <Copy Ratio: 100% (1:1)>.

<ID Card Copy> is not available when using <Paper Save Copy>, <2-Sided>, or <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>.

Place the card (ID Card Copy) Turn the card over

How to place the card

When the <Size/Settings Mismatch> message appears. When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying

81

Collating Copies by Page

15A8-01K

When preparing multiple copies of multi-page documents, set <Collate> to <On> to

collate copies in sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts

for meetings or presentations.

(COPY/SCAN) <Collate> <On>

<Off>

The copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page

document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.

<On>

The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three

copies of a ve-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3,

4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Copying

82

Changing Default Settings

15A8-01L

The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If

you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to

congure the same settings every time you make copies.

<Copy Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the

setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

Settings

Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 65)

Various Copy Settings(P. 69)

Copy Settings(P. 310)

Copying

83

Using the Machine as a Printer

Using the Machine as a Printer …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 85

Printing from a Computer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 86

Printing a Document …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 87

Canceling Prints ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 91

Checking the Printing Status ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 94

Various Print Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 95

Enlarging or Reducing …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 97

Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………… 99

Collating Printouts by Page …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 101

Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet …………………………………………………………………………………… 103

Printing Posters ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 105

Printing Booklet (MF244dw) ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 107

Printing Borders …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 109

Printing Dates and Page Numbers …………………………………………………………………………………………… 110

Printing Watermarks ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 112

Selecting Document Type ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 114

Saving Toner ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 116

Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ……………………………………………………………………………. 118

Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 122

Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings ……………………………………………………….. 123

Changing Default Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 125

Using the Machine as a Printer

84

Using the Machine as a Printer

15A8-01R

There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer

driver, or print from mobile devices. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.

Printing from a Computer

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer(P. 86)

Printing from Mobile Devices

Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 142)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 159)

Using the Machine as a Printer

85

Printing from a Computer

15A8-01S

You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful

settings on the printer driver such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your

documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as

installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.»

About the Printer Driver Help

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed

descriptions that are not in the User’s Guide.

If you are a Mac OS user, see Printer Driver’s User’s Guide for installing the printer drivers and Printer

Driver’s Help for using print functions.

Depending on the operating system and the type or version of the printer driver you are using, the printer

driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

If you are using the MF244dw, you can use the PCL6 printer driver as well as the UFRII LT printer driver. The

available print settings vary depending on the printer driver. For more information, click [Help] on each

printer driver screen.

Using the Machine as a Printer

86

Printing a Document

15A8-01U

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.

Paper settings on the machine

Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before

proceeding to printing. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

The screen that is displayed differs depending on the application you are using.

3Specify the paper size.

[Page Size]

Select the size of a document made in the application.

Using the Machine as a Printer

87

[Output Size]

Select the size of paper on which the document will be actually printed. If the selected size differs from the

one specied in [Page Size], the document is printed enlarged/reduced automatically according to the

selected size. Enlarging or Reducing(P. 97)

Clickable UI

You can easily specify the page layout, binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview image. For more

information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.

4In the [Page Setup] tab, select the paper type.

Set [Paper Type] according to the type of paper to be used in the printing. Loading Paper(P. 42)

5Specify other print settings as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 95)

You can register the settings you specied in this step as a «prole» and use the prole whenever you

print. You can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you print. Registering

Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings(P. 123)

6Click [OK].

Using the Machine as a Printer

88

7Click [Print] or [OK].

Printing starts. On some applications, a screen like shown below appears.

To cancel printing, click [Cancel] when the screen shown above is displayed. After the screen disappears

or if the screen is not displayed, you can cancel printing in other ways. Canceling Prints(P. 91)

When printing from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/10/Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below.

Windows 8/Server 2012

Tap or click [Devices] the printer driver for this machine [Print].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Tap or click [Devices] [Print] the printer driver for this machine [Print].

Windows 10

Select [Print] in the application menu.

If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.

If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to

the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the

machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.

LINKS

Using the Machine as a Printer

89

Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 278)

Using the Machine as a Printer

90

Canceling Prints

15A8-01W

You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.

From a Computer(P. 91)

From the Operation Panel(P. 92)

From a Computer

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

1Double-click the printer icon.

When the printer icon is not displayed

Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434) ), right-click the printer driver icon for

this machine, and click [See what’s printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).

2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].

3Click [Yes].

Printing of the selected document is canceled.

Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

Canceling from the Remote UI

You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print

Documents(P. 278)

Using the Machine as a Printer

91

Canceling from an application

On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].

From the Operation Panel

Cancel printing using or .

Press to Cancel

<Yes>

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Select cancel job <Yes>

Check the Print Job Status before Canceling

<Print Job Status> Select the document on the <Print Job Status> screen

<Cancel> <Yes>

Using the Machine as a Printer

92

Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Checking the Printing Status(P. 94)

Using the Machine as a Printer

93

Checking the Printing Status

15A8-01X

You can check the current print statuses.

Useful in the Following Cases

When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the

documents waiting to be printed.

When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Print Job Status>, and press .

3Select the document to check, and press .

<Print Job Status>

Displays a list of the documents that are being processed or are waiting to be processed.

<Details>

Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Canceling Prints(P. 91)

Using the Machine as a Printer

94

Various Print Settings

15A8-01Y

There are a variety of settings to suit your needs, such as Enlarged/Reduced and 2-sided Printing.

Enlarging or Reducing(P. 97) Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided

Printing (MF244dw)(P. 99)

Collating Printouts by

Page(P. 101)

Printing Multiple Pages onto

One Sheet(P. 103)

Printing Posters(P. 105) Printing Booklet (MF244dw)

(P. 107)

Printing Borders(P. 109) Printing Dates and Page

Numbers(P. 110)

Printing Watermarks(P. 112)

Using the Machine as a Printer

95

Selecting Document Type(P. 114) Saving Toner(P. 116) Combining and Printing Multiple

Documents(P. 118)

Using the Machine as a Printer

96

Enlarging or Reducing

15A8-020

You can make enlarged or reduced printouts by using a preset print ratio, such as A5

to A4, or a custom print ratio that you set in increments of 1%.

Setting Print Ratio by Specifying the Original Document and Paper Size (Preset Ratio)

The print ratio is automatically set based on the document and paper size you have specied.

[Basic Settings] tab Select the document size in [Page Size] Select the paper size in [Output

Size] [OK]

Specifying Print Ratio in Increments of 1%

[Basic Settings] tab Select the [Manual Scaling] check box Enter the print ratio in [Scaling]

[OK]

Using the Machine as a Printer

97

Depending on the selected paper size, you may not be able to set the optimum enlarging/reducing ratio. For

example, there may be large blank spaces on your printout, or portions of the document that are missing.

The enlarging/reducing settings on some applications have priority over those on the printer driver.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

98

Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing

15A8-021

You can make both 1-sided and 2-sided printouts. The default setting is [2-sided Printing].

Change the setting as necessary.

2-sided printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Paper(P. 419)

[Basic Settings] tab Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet

Printing] Select the position to bind in [Binding Location] [OK]

[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]

Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing].

For [Booklet Printing], see Printing Booklet (MF244dw)(P. 107) .

[Binding Location]

Specify the position to bind the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. Printing orientation will be

changed depending on the specied binding position. To specify the margin width for the binding position,

click [Gutter].

[Long Edge [Left]]

Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.

Using the Machine as a Printer

99

[Short Edge [Top]]

Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.

[Gutter]

Specify a binding margin.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 103)

Printing Booklet (MF244dw)(P. 107)

Using the Machine as a Printer

100

Collating Printouts by Page

15A8-022

When printing copies of multi-page documents, select [Collate] to print complete sets in

sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or

presentations.

[Basic Settings] tab Select [Collate] or [Group] in [Collate/Group] [OK]

[Collate/Group]

Specify the sorting method of the printouts when printing multiple-page documents.

[Collate]

The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing

three copies of a ve-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4,

5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

[Group]

The printouts are not collated. For example, if you are printing three copies of a ve-page document, the

printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.

Using the Machine as a Printer

101

If you select [Off], whether the printouts are collated or not depends on the setting made on the

application.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

102

Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet

15A8-023

You can print multiple pages onto a single sheet. For example, you can print four or

nine pages onto a single sheet by using [4 on 1] or [9 on 1]. Use this function if you

want to save paper or to view your document in thumbnails.

To save more paper, combine this setting with 2-sided printing. Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing

(MF244dw)(P. 99)

[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet In

[Page Order], select the page distribution layout [OK]

[Page Layout]

Select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet from [1 on 1] to [16 on 1]. For example, to print 16

pages onto a single sheet, select [16 on 1].

For options such as [Poster [2 x 2]], see Printing Posters(P. 105) .

Printing may not be performed properly if you combine this setting with an application setting for

collating printouts.

Using the Machine as a Printer

103

[Page Order]

Select a page distribution layout. For example, if you select [Across from Left], the rst page is printed on the

top left, and then the rest of the pages are arranged rightward.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw)(P. 99)

Using the Machine as a Printer

104

Printing Posters

15A8-024

You can print one page of a document onto multiple pages. For example, if you make

a one-page A4-size document nine times larger, you will have a poster 3×3 A4 size

sheets large after you print the document and paste it together.

[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the dimensions of your poster (for example, [Poster [2

x 2]]) [OK]

[Page Layout]

Select the layout for poster printing. There are four size settings:[Poster [1 x 2]], [Poster [2 x 2]], [Poster [3 x

3]], and [Poster [4 x 4]].

Poster size settings cannot be selected when 2-sided printing is enabled. Select [1-sided Printing] in [1-

sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing], and then select a poster size setting.

[Poster Details]

The screen below appears.

Using the Machine as a Printer

105

[Print Margin Borders]

Borders are printed on each page. The borders are helpful if you want to paste the printouts together or

cut off the margins.

[Set Margins for Cutting/Pasting]

Prints margins to allow cutting or pasting. To print markings so that margins can be easily identied,

select the [Print Marks for Alignment] check box.

[Pages to Print]

[All Pages]: Carry out poster printing for all pages.

[Specify Pages]: Carry out poster printing only for specied pages.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Enlarging or Reducing(P. 97)

Using the Machine as a Printer

106

Printing Booklet

15A8-025

You can print two pages of a document on both sides of paper and then fold your

printed pages in half to make a booklet. The printer driver controls the print order in

such a way that the page numbers are correctly arranged.

Booklet printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. The paper that is available for 2-

sided printing is also available for booklet printing. See Paper(P. 419) .

[Basic Settings] tab Select [Booklet Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing] Click

[Booklet] to specify detailed settings as necessary [OK] [OK]

[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]

Select [Booklet Printing].

For [1-sided Printing] and [2-sided Printing], see Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw)

(P. 99) .

[Booklet]

The screen below is displayed.

Using the Machine as a Printer

107

[Booklet Printing Method]

[All Pages at Once]: Prints all of the pages at once as a single bundle so that you can make a booklet just

by folding the printed pages in half.

[Divide into Sets]: Prints as multiple bundles divided by the number of the pages specied on [Sheets

per Set]. Bind each bundle, and then combine them as one booklet. Select this option when the

document has so many pages that you cannot bind them all into a single booklet.

[Specify Booklet Gutter]

If you are using a stapler or other binding tools, specify the margin width for binding your booklet. Select

the [Specify Booklet Gutter] check box and specify the margin width in [Booklet Gutter].

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

108

Printing Borders

15A8-026

You can add borders, such as broken lines or double lines, in the margins of

printouts.

[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the border type in [Edging] [OK] [OK]

[Edging]

Select the border type.

Preview

Displays a preview with the selected border.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 110)

Printing Watermarks(P. 112)

Using the Machine as a Printer

109

Printing Dates and Page Numbers

15A8-027

You can print the information such as dates or page numbers, and you can specify

where to print this information on the document (upper-left, lower-right, etc.).

[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the print position of the print date, user name or

page number [OK] [OK]

[Print Date]

Specify the position to print the print date.

[Print User Name]

Specify the position to print the user name (logon name) for the computer used to print the document.

[Print Page Number]

Specify the position to print the page number.

Changing the Print Format of Dates and Page Numbers

You can change formatting details such as font and font size when printing dates, logon names, or page

numbers. Click [Format Settings] on the [Page Options] screen shown above to specify the details.

Using the Machine as a Printer

110

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Printing Borders(P. 109)

Printing Watermarks(P. 112)

Using the Machine as a Printer

111

Printing Watermarks

15A8-028

You can print watermarks such as «COPY» or «CONFIDENTIAL» over the document.

You can create new watermarks or use pre-registered watermarks.

[Page Setup] tab Select the [Watermark] check box Select a watermark from the drop-down list

[OK]

[Watermark]

Select the [Watermark] check box to display the list of the watermarks in the drop-down list. Select a

watermark from the menu.

[Edit Watermark]

Displays the screen to create or edit watermarks.

Using the Machine as a Printer

112

[Add]

Click to create a new watermark. Up to 50 watermarks can be registered.

[Name]

Enter the created watermark name.

[Attributes]/[Alignment]/[Print Style]

Click each tab to specify the text, color, or print position of the watermark. For more information, click [Help]

on the printer driver screen.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Printing Borders(P. 109)

Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 110)

Using the Machine as a Printer

113

Selecting Document Type

15A8-029

You can specify the document type to ensure optimal image quality. There are

different settings for photo documents, documents that have charts or graphs, and

documents that have design drawings with ne lines.

[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] [OK]

[Objective]

Select an option that suits the document type or purpose of printing. For example, select [General] for

general use, or select [Photos] when you want to print photo images in optimal print quality.

[General]

A versatile option that is suitable when printing most documents.

[Publications]

Suitable when printing documents that have a mix of photo images, charts, and graphs.

[Graphics]

Suitable when printing documents that have charts or graphs.

[Photos]

Suitable when printing photo images.

[Designs [CAD]]

Suitable when printing design drawings that have many ne lines.

[High Denition Text]

Suitable when printing documents that have small characters.

Using the Machine as a Printer

114

To specify detailed settings for each item selected on [Objective], click [Advanced Settings]. For more

information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

115

Saving Toner

15A8-02A

You can set the printer driver to print documents using less toner.

When the toner save setting is enabled, ne lines and portions with lighter print density may become

blurred.

[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] Click [Advanced Settings] Select [Toner

Save] in the [Advanced Settings] screen Select [On] from the drop-down list [OK] [OK]

[Objective] Selecting Document Type(P. 114)

Select the document type for which you want to enable the toner save setting.

Using the Machine as a Printer

116

[Advanced Settings]

A screen with settings is displayed. Click [Toner Save] and select [On] from the drop-down list on the bottom

of the screen.

You can specify whether to enable the toner save setting for each document type. Specify the toner save

setting for each document type listed in [Objective].

In the [Advanced Settings] screen, you can specify various print settings other than toner save settings.

For more information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

117

Combining and Printing Multiple Documents

15A8-02C

By using Canon PageComposer, you can combine multiple documents into one print

job and print the job with specied print settings. This function, for example, enables

you to combine documents made with different applications and print all of the

pages in the same paper size.

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Select [Edit and Preview] in [Output Method].

Click [OK] on the [Information] pop-up screen.

Click [OK] at the bottom of the screen.

4Click [Print] or [OK].

Using the Machine as a Printer

118

The Canon PageComposer starts. Printing does not start in this step.

5Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the documents you want to combine.

The documents are added to the Canon PageComposer.

6From the [Document Name] list, select the documents to combine, and click .

To select multiple documents, click the documents while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.

7Change the settings as necessary, and click [Combine].

The documents selected in step 6 are combined.

Using the Machine as a Printer

119

[Print Preview]

Displays a preview of the document to be printed.

[Document List]/[Print Settings]

Click the [Document List] tab to display the documents added in steps 1 to 4. You can remove

documents by selecting them in the list and clicking [Delete from List].

Click the [Print Settings] tab to display the screen for specifying print settings such as the number of

copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing. The settings specied here are applied to the whole print job.

For more information, click [Help] on the Canon PageComposer screen.

[Details]

Displays the print setting screen of the printer driver. There are fewer settings available than when using

the ordinary printing method.

Using the Machine as a Printer

120

8On the [Document Name] list, select the combined-document print job you want to

print, and click .

Printing starts.

For instructions on how to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints(P. 91) .

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Using the Machine as a Printer

121

Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs

15A8-02E

You can register combinations of settings as «Proles» to suit your different printing needs. Also, you can register the

settings that you frequently use as the default setting. Once the default setting is set, the registered settings are

automatically displayed on the printer driver screen, and you can skip the operations to specify the print settings and

print immediately.

Specify «TOP SECRET» for a watermark and register it as a

«Prole.» Just select this «Prole» when you need it.

Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print

Settings(P. 123)

Specify [2 on 1] as the user default in the printer driver.

The next and following print jobs will be performed so

that each two pages are shrinked and printed on one

page. Changing Default Settings(P. 125)

Using the Machine as a Printer

122

Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print

Settings

15A8-02F

Specifying combinations of settings such as «1-sided landscape orientation on A4 size paper» every time you print may

be time consuming. If you register these frequently used combinations of print settings as «proles,» you can specify

printing settings simply by selecting one of these proles from the list. This section describes how to register proles

and how to print using them.

Registering a Prole(P. 123)

Selecting a Prole(P. 124)

Registering a Prole

1Change the settings that you want to register as a prole, and click [Add].

Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each

screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 95)

2Enter a prole name in [Name], select an icon, and then click [OK].

Enter comments on the prole in [Comment] as necessary.

Click [View Settings] to see the settings to register.

Editing a prole

By clicking [Edit] on the right side of [Add] on the screen shown in step 1, you can change the name, icon, or

comment of the proles you have previously registered. You cannot edit the pre-registered proles.

Using the Machine as a Printer

123

Selecting a Prole

Select the prole that suits your needs, and click [OK].

Changing the settings of the selected prole

You can change the settings of a selected prole. In addition, the changed settings can be registered as

another prole.

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Changing Default Settings(P. 125)

Using the Machine as a Printer

124

Changing Default Settings

15A8-02H

The default settings are the settings that are rst displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer

driver, but you can change them. For example, if you want to print all documents in such manner that each two pages

are shrinked and printed on one page, specify [2 on 1] as the user default of page layout. From next time on, the

printer driver will be opened with [2 on 1] specied as page layout setting and you will not have to change settings

each time you print.

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].

3Change the settings on the print setting screen, and click [OK].

Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each

screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 95)

Using the Machine as a Printer

125

LINKS

Printing a Document(P. 87)

Various Print Settings(P. 95)

Using the Machine as a Printer

126

Using the Machine as a Scanner

Using the Machine as a Scanner …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 128

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………. 129

Scanning from the Machine ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 130

Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 133

Scanning from a Computer ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 137

Scanning Using an Application ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 138

Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF ……………………………………………………………………………………… 140

Using the Machine as a Scanner

127

Using the Machine as a Scanner

15A8-02J

You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.

Whichever way you use, the scanned documents are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan

function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.

To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of

software to a computer. For more information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.» To connect the machine to

your computer via a network, you must register the machine to the installed software. Preparing to Use

the Machine as a Scanner (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 129)

If you are a Mac OS user, see the User’s Guide for ScanGear MF for installing the software and for using scan

functions.

Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the

screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

Scanning from the Machine

You can scan and save documents to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine.

Scanning from the Machine(P. 130)

Scanning from a Computer

You can scan documents placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned documents are saved to the computer.

You can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing

or word-processing application. Scanning from a Computer(P. 137)

Scanning from Mobile Devices (MF244dw / MF232w)

Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

scan documents set on this machine. Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw /

MF232w)(P. 142)

Using the Machine as a Scanner

128

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner

15A8-02K

Make sure that the machine and your computer are connected and all software is installed. For how to check, see «MF

Driver Installation Guide.» To connect via a wireless or wired LAN, you must register this machine in MF Network

Scanner Selector. Register by following the procedure below. This procedure is not required if the machine and your

computer are connected via USB.

The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment. Use

IPv4 or a USB connection.

1Click in the system tray.

2Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].

Up to ten computers can be connected at a time on a network to one product (scanner).

Using the Machine as a Scanner

129

Scanning from the Machine

15A8-02L

The sequence of «scanning a document and saving it to a computer» can be done

entirely from the machine. Scan while specifying what computer documents will be

saved to; whether to scan documents in color or black and white; whether to save

documents as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings.

1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 38)

2Press (COPY/SCAN) to switch to the Scan mode screen.

3Use / to select <Computer>, and press .

4 Select the destination computer, and press .

This screen is not displayed if only a computer is connected to the machine via USB.

5Select the scan type.

Using the Machine as a Scanner

130

Scan type Color Resolution File format

<Color Scan> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

<B&W Scan> Black and white*1 300 dpi PDF (searchable*2)

<Custom 1> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

<Custom 2> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.

*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.

To change settings

The settings in the table above are all factory default settings. You can change settings from MF Scan

Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

If you are a Mac OS user, see the User’s Guide for ScanGear MF.

6Press .

Scanning starts.

To cancel, press <Yes> .

You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the

screen before scanning.

When placing documents in the feeder in step 1 (MF244dw)

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when le format is PDF).

1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen

glass, and press .

Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Use / to select <Finish Scanning>, and press .

Using the Machine as a Scanner

131

The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

About the save destination folder

By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning

date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

You can change the save destination from MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF

Scan Utility.

Scan from the machine more easily

If you have regularly used preferences, such as scanning in color or black and white, or a pre-determined

computer where scanned documents will be saved, specifying these settings each time you scan can be

troublesome. Register these settings in a [Scan -> PC] key so that you can scan with one press of a key.

Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key(P. 133)

Using the Machine as a Scanner

132

Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key

15A8-02R

Place a document on the machine, and press (for MF232w, or

), and scanning starts immediately. The type of scan (color or black and

white), the save destination for the document, and other settings can be registered

to a button, and documents can be scanned using those settings. This section

describes how to register settings in a button and scan with it.

Registering Your Settings in the [Scan -> PC] Key(P. 133)

Using the [Scan -> PC] Key(P. 135)

Registering Your Settings in the [Scan -> PC] Key

Register the computer that scanned images are saved in and the type of scan to (for MF232w, or

).

1Press .

2Use / to select <Scan Settings>, and press .

3Select <Shortcut Key Settings> <Register>.

4Press .

If you are using the MF232w, select the shortcut key to which you want to register settings, and press .

Using the Machine as a Scanner

133

If you are using the MF232w / MF231, select the shortcut key to which you

want to register settings, and press

5Select the type of connection that is used between the machine and computer, and

press .

<Off>

Select this setting to erase registered settings.

<USB Connection>

Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via USB.

<Network Connection> (MF244dw / MF232w)

Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via a network.

6Select the destination computer, and press .

This screen is not displayed if you select <USB Connection> in step 5.

7Select the scan type, and press .

Scan type Color Resolution File format

<Color Scan> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

<B&W Scan> Black and white*1 300 dpi PDF (searchable*2)

*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.

*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.

Using the Machine as a Scanner

134

Scan type Color Resolution File format

<Custom 1> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

<Custom 2> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)

*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.

*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.

To change settings

The settings in the table above are all factory default settings. You can change settings from MF Scan

Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

If you are a Mac OS user, see the User’s Guide for ScanGear MF.

Checking the Registered Settings

<Scan Settings> <Shortcut Key Settings> <Conrm

Destination> Select shortcut key

Name of destination computer

Shows the name of the computer registered as the save destination.

Scan type

Shows the type of scan that has been set.

Using the [Scan -> PC] Key

1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 38)

2Press (for MF232w, or ).

Using the Machine as a Scanner

135

To check the settings registered in the key, see Checking the Registered Settings(P. 135) .

Scanning starts.

To cancel, press <Yes> .

You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the

screen before scanning.

When placing documents in the feeder in step 1 (MF244dw)

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when le format is PDF).

1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen

glass, and press .

Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Use / to select <Finish Scanning>, and press .

The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

About the save destination folder

By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning

date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

You can change the save destination from MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF

Scan Utility.

LINKS

Scanning from the Machine(P. 130)

Using the Machine as a Scanner

136

Scanning from a Computer

15A8-02S

There are two ways to scan from a computer: using MF Scan Utility and using an application such as an image-

processing or word-processing application.

Scanning Using MF Scan Utility

MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan

documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specied

application, or attach it to an e-mail message. After installing it from the supplied DVD-

ROM, click [MF Scan Utility] displayed in the Windows start menu to start MF Scan Utility.

For details on using this utility, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

If you are a Mac OS user, see the User’s Guide for ScanGear MF.

Scanning Using an Application

You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or image-

processing application, and load the images directly into the application. You do not

need to start another application to scan.

Using the Machine as a Scanner

137

Scanning Using an Application

15A8-02U

You can scan documents from applications such as image-processing or word-

processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application, allowing

you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure varies

depending on the application.

The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual

for your application.

* TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an

integrated standard in Windows.

1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 38)

The second or subsequent documents may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed

depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one document at a time.

When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, you must press (COPY/SCAN) <Remote

Scanner> to bring the machine online. Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 333)

2From the application, select the start scan command.

The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more

information, see the instruction manual for your application.

3Select the scanner driver for the machine.

Select ScanGear MF or WIA.

4Congure the scan settings as necessary.

For more information about ScanGear MF scan settings, see Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear

MF(P. 140)

5Click [Scan].

Using the Machine as a Scanner

138

Scanning of the document starts.

When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.

LINKS

Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 140)

Using the Machine as a Scanner

139

Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF

15A8-02W

ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear

MF to congure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of

starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.

Starting from MF Scan Utility

When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For instructions on how to use

ScanGear MF, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

If you are a Mac OS user, see the User’s Guide for ScanGear MF.

Starting from an Application

To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as

scanner driver. Scanning Using an Application(P. 138)

For instructions on how to use ScanGear MF, click on the ScanGear MF icon and see the Help.

Using the Machine as a Scanner

140

Can Be Used Conveniently with a

Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………. 142

Connecting to a Mobile Device …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 143

Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 144

Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ……………………………………………………………. 147

Using AirPrint …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 148

Printing with AirPrint …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 153

Scanning with AirPrint …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 156

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 158

Using Google Cloud Print …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 159

Managing the Machine Remotely …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 163

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

141

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device

15A8-02X

Combining the machine with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to use an appropriate

application to perform printing, scan, or other operation with ease. You can also use a mobile device to operate the

machine remotely, check the printing status, and change machine’s settings.

Connecting to a Mobile Device(P. 143)

Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications(P. 147)

Managing the Machine Remotely(P. 163)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

142

Connecting to a Mobile Device

15A8-02Y

When connecting the machine to a mobile device, you can select whether to connect via a wireless LAN router or

Direct Connection. Select the connection method that best suits your environment and devices.

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router

Like when connecting a computer and the machine, connect a mobile device and the machine via a wireless LAN

router. For how to connect your mobile device and wireless LAN, see the instruction manual for the device or contact

your manufacturer.

Connect the machine to the router with a wired LAN or wireless LAN. Connecting to a Network(P. 166)

Making Direct Connection

Connect the mobile device and the machine directly without using a wireless LAN router. Even where no wireless LAN

environment is available, you can quickly connect the machine and a mobile device. You can also congure the

machine to exit Direct Connection mode automatically once a certain period of time elapses after the machine enters

Direct Connection mode and switch to a wireless LAN connection. Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)

(P. 144)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

143

Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)

15A8-030

Even in an environment without wireless LAN router, you can connect your mobile device and the machine without

going through dicult settings when you use «Access Point Mode,» which allows you to wirelessly and directly connect

your mobile device to the machine.

Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)

Follow these steps to establish a connection using Access Point Mode.

Put the machine into Access Point Mode.

Set <Use Direct Connection> to <On>.

Use Direct Connection (P. 289)

If connected to the network by wireless LAN

A screen for selecting the Direct Connection method is displayed.

<Direct Connection Only>

Connection by wireless LAN becomes unavailable. Set when only using Direct

Connection.

<Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>

A wireless LAN connection is disconnected only when using Direct Connection. Set

when wishing to switch between Direct Connection and connection by wireless

LAN.

Put the machine into a connection waiting state.

Press <Direct Connection> . The machine enters the state in which you

can connect your mobile device to the machine.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

144

Connecting from a mobile device

Based on the SSID and network key displayed in the display, make wireless LAN

connection settings for connecting to the machine.

The screen below appears in the display during the connection process.

<Disconnect>

Stops the Direct Connection procedure. When printing, scanning, or other

desired operation is complete, select <Disconnect> and press to terminate

the connection.

<Connection Information>

You can view the information on the Direct Connection being proceeding.

When the machine is in Direct Connection mode, it is possible that you cannot connect to the Internet

depending on your mobile device.

If <Use Custom SSID> is <Off> when the machine is in Direct Connection mode, only a single device can be

connected at a time.

If wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network

key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.

If while in communication by Direct Connection, a duration when there is no data transmission between the

machine and the mobile device lasts for some time, the communication may terminate.

The machine’s SSID and network key are changed each time the Direct Connection procedure is started.

While in Direct Connection, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power.

If you use the Direct Connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may

prevent proper communication after using the Direct Connection.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

145

Setting an arbitrary SSID and network key

You can enter and set the SSID and network key used for Direct Connection yourself. Setting any SSID allows

up to 5 devices to connect to the machine at the same time. Access Point Mode Settings(P. 289)

Exiting from Direct Connection mode automatically

You can also congure the machine to exit Direct Connection mode automatically once a certain period of

time elapses after the machine enters Direct Connection mode. If <Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>

is specied as the connection method in Direct Connection mode, the machine connects to a wireless LAN

automatically after exiting Direct Connection mode.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 168)

Time Until Direct Connection Termination (P. 289)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

146

Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing

Applications

15A8-031

You can use an appropriate application that enables you to perform printing, scanning, or other operation by

operating the machine from your mobile device. The machine supports a dedicated application from Canon and

various other applications. You can select the most appropriate application to your mobile device, the purpose, the

situation, and so on.

Printing/Scanning via Canon PRINT Business

You can print from mobile devices that support iOS/Android, and place and scan originals with the machine, then send

to a mobile device. When printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on

supported operating systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the Canon website (http://

www.canon.com/).

Printing with Canon Print Service

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on

supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).

Using Google Cloud Print

You can print from an application or service that supports Google Cloud Print. You can print by remotely operating the

machine at any time and from anywhere, for example even while you are on the go. Using Google Cloud

Print(P. 159)

Printing with Mopria™

This machine also supports Mopria™. Using Mopria™ allows you to print with printers of different models from

different manufacturers by using common operations and common settings. For example, assume that Mopria™

compatible printers of different models from different manufacturers are installed in your oce, at your place, or at

places you are visiting. You can then print with any of those printers by using Mopria™ without the need to install the

respective dedicated applications on them. For details about the models supporting Mopria™ and the system

requirements, see http://www.mopria.org.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

147

Using AirPrint

15A8-032

You can print or scan without using drivers by sending print data from Apple devices.

AirPrint settings

Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 148)

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 151)

Functions of the AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 153)

Scanning with AirPrint(P. 156)

Troubleshooting

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 158)

Conguring AirPrint Settings

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying

the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read «click» as «tap» in this section.

3Click [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

148

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings, and click [OK].

[Use AirPrint]

Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.

[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Speed/Image Quality Priority]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]

Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating

your Apple device. This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer. Also select whether

to give priority to print speed or to print quality.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

149

If you select the [Use AirPrint] check box

The following items are also set to <On> automatically.

<mDNS Settings> for IPv4 and IPv6 Conguring DNS(P. 212)

<Use HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

[Use IPP Printing] under [IPP Print Settings] Changing the Setting of Functions Available with

AirPrint(P. 150)

<Use Network Link Scan> Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 150)

If you change [Printer Name]

If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the

Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name>

( Conguring DNS(P. 212) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the

Mac again.

Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint

If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the

necessary setting using the operation panel or Remote UI.

Changing Print Settings

To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

Turning the function On/Off

You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].

Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote

UI(P. 273) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPP Print

Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]

Changing the TLS setting

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The factory

default setting is [On].

When the machine is connected to a Mac via USB, set [Use TLS] to [Off].

Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote

UI(P. 273) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPP Print

Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]

Changing Scan Settings

To perform scanning with AirPrint, Network Link Scan is used.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

150

Turning the function On/Off

You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

<Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan

Settings> <Use Network Link Scan> Select <Off> or

<On>

Changing the TLS setting

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing scanning with AirPrint. The

factory default setting is [On].

When the machine is connected to a Mac via USB, set [Use TLS] to [Off].

Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote

UI(P. 273) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Network Link

Scan Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view

information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function

settings ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ).

1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].

2Select this machine and click [Options & Supplies].

3Click [Show Printer Webpage].

4Log on to the Remote UI.

To change AirPrint settings, log on in System Manager Mode.

The screen for AirPrint is displayed.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

151

Trademarks

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

152

Printing with AirPrint

15A8-033

You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint

enables you to print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.

Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 153)

Printing from Mac(P. 154)

System Requirements

To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.

iPad (all models)

iPhone (3GS or later)

iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*

* OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.

Network Environment

You need one of the following environments.

The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.

The Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection.

The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.

For printing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available

with AirPrint(P. 150)

Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple

device.

For how to make sure of this, see «Getting Started.» Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

For how to make sure whether the Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection, see Make

Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 144) .

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

153

2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

3From the drop-down list, tap [Print].

4Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].

The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.

[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using

those applications.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

You can specify the halftones setting for image les using the operation panel. Mobile Print

Halftones(P. 315)

6Tap [Print].

Printing starts.

Checking the print status

During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].

Printing from Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.

For how to make sure of this, see «Getting Started.» Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for another operation.

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

4Select this machine in the print dialog box.

The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

154

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

You can specify the halftones setting for image les using the operation panel. Mobile Print

Halftones(P. 315)

6Click [Print].

Printing starts.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

155

Scanning with AirPrint

15A8-034

You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.

System Requirements

To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.

Network Environment

You need one of the following environments.

The Mac and the machine are connected to the same LAN.

The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.

For scanning, it is required to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 150)

Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function ( Auto

Online for Remote Scan(P. 333) ) is set to <Off>, use the following steps to bring the machine online before

starting the procedure for scanning. (COPY/SCAN) Select <Remote Scanner>

You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing an

operation whatsoever.

Scanning from the Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to the Mac.

For how to make sure of this, see «Getting Started.» Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

2Add the machine to your Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for another operation.

3Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

4Click [Scan].

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

156

5Click [Open Scanner].

The [Scanner] screen is displayed.

6Congure the scan settings as necessary.

7Click [Scan].

Scanning starts, and scanned data is displayed.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

157

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used

15A8-035

If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.

Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10

seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.

Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.

Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may

take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.

Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.

For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner cartridge

remaining. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 151)

For scanning, make sure that the machine’s setting for Network Link Scan is <On>. Changing the Setting of

Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 150)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

158

Using Google Cloud Print

15A8-036

Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user who has a Google account to print from applications compatible

with Google Cloud Print via a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet. Unlike conventional printing

from a computer, Google Cloud Print enables you to print without using a printer driver. For example, if you want to

print an e-mail or les that are attached to an e-mail, you can print just by using an application compatible with Google

Cloud Print. You will nd your printouts when you go to the machine.

Checking the Machine Settings(P. 159)

Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 159)

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 160)

When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to

connect the machine to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.

You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.

Google Cloud Print does not support printing from IPv6 addresses.

To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google website to

create your account.

Checking the Machine Settings

Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:

Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169)

Make sure that the date and time and the time zone settings are correct. Date/Time Settings(P. 303)

Changing Google Cloud Print Settings

Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the

machine.

1Press .

2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

159

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Google Cloud Print Settings> <Enable Google Cloud Print>, and press .

4Select <On> or <Off>, and press .

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print

Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

160

4Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

If [Register] is unavailable

You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box, and

then click [OK].

To reregister the machine

To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the

machine and register it again.

5Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].

6Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.

You can print from a Google Cloud Print compatible application such as Google Chrome™.

Access the Google Cloud Print website for information about the latest applications that support Google

Cloud Print.

Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome

You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome*. The machine’s display shows

the following conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Select <Yes> to complete the

registration.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

161

* For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print website.

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

162

Managing the Machine Remotely

15A8-037

You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the

machine’s status and specify machine’s settings from your mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be

displayed properly for some devices and environments.

Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device

Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the

machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 194) ). If you have any questions, ask your Network

Administrator.

1Start the Web browser on your mobile device.

2Enter «http://<the IP address of the machine>/» in the address eld.

If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://

[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

Some items of the Remote UI are not displayed in its «Smartphone Version.» If you want to check all items,

see the «PC Version.»

LINKS

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 272)

Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)

163

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 165

Connecting to a Network …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 166

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 168

Connecting to a Wired LAN …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 169

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 170

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ………………………………………………………………… 172

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode …………………………………………………………………….. 174

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ………………………………………………………………… 177

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ……………………………………………………………….. 180

Checking the SSID and Network Key ………………………………………………………………………………………… 184

Setting IP Addresses ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 187

Setting IPv4 Address ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 188

Setting IPv6 Addresses ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 191

Viewing Network Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 194

Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer …………………………………………………………………….. 197

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ………………………………………………………………………….. 198

Conguring Printer Ports …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 201

Setting Up Print Server ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 204

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ………………………………………………………………….. 207

Conguring Ethernet Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 208

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit …………………………………………………………………………………….. 210

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network …………………………………………………………………………….. 211

Conguring DNS ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 212

Conguring SNTP ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 216

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ………………………………………………………………………… 218

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

164

Network

15A8-038

The machine has been designed for exibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced

technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine

has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time.

Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine’s Network Settings

Connecting to a Network(P. 166) Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Conguring or Preparing for Print/Scan Functions

Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer(P. 197)

Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 207)

Direct Connection to a mobile device

You can directly communicate with the machine from your mobile device without the need to congure

dicult network settings. Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

165

Connecting to a Network

15A8-039

When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to

the selected network. Select «wired» or «wireless» depending on your communication environment and networking

devices. For steps to connect the machine and set an IP address, see «Getting Started» ( Manuals Included with the

Machine(P. 425) ). For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third

party.

The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.

The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.

For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact

your manufacturer.

Before You Start

Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.

Check your computer settings.

Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more

information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the

device manufacturers.

Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the

network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the

network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.

Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the

communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/

100BASE-TX) ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 208) ). For more information,

contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

To check the MAC address of the machine.

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 194)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 195)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

166

To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X

Authentication(P. 252)

Select wired or wireless LAN.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 168)

Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.

Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Set the IP address as necessary.

This step is required when you want to assign a specic IP address to the machine or

change the dynamic IP addressing protocol from the default DHCP.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 187)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

167

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN

15A8-03A

After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN

using the operation panel. For how to connect to and specify settings for a wireless LAN/wired LAN, see «Getting

Started» ( Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425) ). Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to

<Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you will need to uninstall MF Drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them.

For more information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.»

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>, and press .

4Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>, and press .

LINKS

Connecting to a Network(P. 166)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

168

Connecting to a Wired LAN

15A8-03C

Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.

1Connect a LAN cable.

Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.

Push the connector in until it clicks into place.

2Wait approximately 2 minutes.

While you wait, the IP address is set automatically.

You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 187)

LINKS

Connecting to a Network(P. 166)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

169

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

15A8-03E

Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is

equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking

devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in

detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the

network.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 170)

Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 171)

Risk of information leak

Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an

unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in

wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

Wireless LAN security

The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security

compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your

manufacturer.

128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Required devices for wireless LAN connection

The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.

The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communicate in 2.4 GHz frequency

band. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your

manufacturer.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS

When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

170

Push Button Mode

Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on

your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 172)

PIN Code Mode

Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in

the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 174)

If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Manually Setting Up Connection

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required

information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID

and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184) ).

Selecting a Wireless Router

Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as

possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Manually Entering the Setup Information

If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the

SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

LINKS

Connecting to a Network(P. 166)

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 168)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

171

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode

15A8-03F

If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.

How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking

device for help.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .

If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

4Read the message that is displayed, and press .

5Select <WPS Push Button Mode>, and press .

6Select <Yes>, and press .

7Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.

The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after pressing in step 6.

Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.

See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

172

If an error message is displayed during setup

Press and return to step 5.

8Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.

The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.

When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi

indicator lights up.

Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

Signal strength

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the

strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Reducing power consumption

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

Power Save Mode (P. 288)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

173

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode

15A8-03H

If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to

the networking device.

How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking

device for help.

From a Computer

1Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a

WPS PIN code.

For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.

From the Operation Panel

2Press .

3Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

4Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .

If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

5Read the message that is displayed, and press .

6Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>, and press .

7Select <Yes>, and press .

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

174

A PIN code is generated.

From a Computer

8Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.

Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.

The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after pressing in step 7.

If an error message is displayed during setup

Press and return to step 6.

From the Operation Panel

9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.

The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.

When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi

indicator lights up.

Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

Signal strength

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the

strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

175

Reducing power consumption

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

Power Save Mode (P. 288)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

176

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router

15A8-03J

You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the

machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or TKIP. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the

required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184) ).

Security settings

If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to

<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to select

<Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up the

connection using the manual entry method ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed

Settings(P. 180) ).

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .

If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

4Read the message that is displayed, and press .

5Select <SSID Settings>, and press .

6Select <Select Access Point>, and press .

The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

177

If <Cannot nd the access point.> is displayed

See When an Error Message Appears(P. 347) .

7Select a wireless LAN router, and press .

Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.

If your wireless router is not found

Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/

Settings Problems(P. 356)

8Enter the network key that you have written down.

Enter the network key using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press .

Entering Text(P. 35)

WEP WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

9Select <Yes>, and press .

If an error message is displayed during setup

Press , check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.

10 Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.

The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

178

When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi

indicator lights up.

Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

Signal strength

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the

strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Reducing power consumption

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

Power Save Mode (P. 288)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

179

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings

15A8-03K

If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other

procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed

settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security

protocols ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184) ).

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .

If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

4Read the message that is displayed, and press .

5Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.

6Enter the SSID that you have written down.

Enter the SSID using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press . Entering Text(P. 35)

7Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.

If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>, and press .

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

180

Using WEP

1Select <WEP>, and press .

2Select an authentication method, and press .

<Open System>

Sets open system authentication, which is also called «open authentication.»

<Shared Key>

Uses the WEP key as a password.

When <Open System> is selected

When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key

authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the

setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.

3Select <Edit WEP Key>, and press .

4Select the WEP key (1 to 4) you want to edit, and press .

Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

5Enter the network key that you have written down.

Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and select <Apply>, and press . Entering

Text(P. 35)

6Select <Select WEP Key>, and press .

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

181

7Select the WEP key you have edited, and press .

Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

1Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>, and press .

2Select an encryption method, and press .

<Auto>

Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.

<AES-CCMP>

Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.

3Enter the network key that you have written down.

Enter the network key using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press . Entering

Text(P. 35)

8Select <Yes>, and press .

If an error message is displayed during setup

Press , check whether the specied settings are correct, and return to step 5.

9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.

The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

182

When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi

indicator lights up.

Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.

Signal strength

When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the

strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Reducing power consumption

You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

Power Save Mode (P. 288)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

183

Checking the SSID and Network Key

15A8-03L

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.

The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the

necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include

«access point name» and «network name.»

Network Key

A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other

terms used for network key include «encryption key,» «WEP key,» «WPA/WPA2 passphrase,»

and «preshared key (PSK).»

Wireless Security

Protocols

(Authentication/

Encryption)

When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to

specify security settings. Check the following information:

Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)

Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)

Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer

The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check

them by using the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant included with the provided DVD-ROM. The Canon MF/LBP

Wireless Setup Assistant can be used on a computer connected to a wireless LAN.

If you are a Mac OS user

The provided DVD-ROM that comes with the machine does not contain the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup

Assistant for Mac OS. It is available from the following Canon Web site: http://www.canon.com/

1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.

2Click [Start Software Programs].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

184

If the above screen is not displayed Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup]

Screen(P. 435)

If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].

3Click [Start] for [Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant].

4Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

185

5Check the information displayed for the wireless router.

Write down the necessary information. If you do not know what information is necessary, write down all the

information that is displayed.

If wireless routers are not found

Click [Refresh]. If nothing happens, check that the settings are correctly congured on the computer and the

wireless router.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

186

Setting IP Addresses

15A8-03R

Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are

available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you

need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

187

Setting IPv4 Address

15A8-03S

The machine’s IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP

addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the

machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly

inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169) ). You can test the

network connection if necessary.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188)

Testing the Network Connection(P. 190)

Setting IPv4 Address

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.

4Congure IP address settings.

<Auto Acquire>

Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP. When <Auto Acquire: On> is

displayed, automatic addressing is enabled.

<Manually Acquire>

Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this

option, <Auto Acquire> must be set to <Off>.

<Check Settings>

Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

Automatically assigning an IP address

1Select <Auto Acquire> <Select Protocol>.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

188

2Select <DHCP>, <BOOTP>, or <RARP>, and press .

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address

Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP>, <BOOTP>, or <RARP> when these services are unavailable, the

machine will waste time and communications resources searching the network for these services.

3Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

4Select <Apply>, and press .

IP addresses assigned via DHCP/BOOTP/RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Manually entering an IP address

1Check that <Auto Acquire> is set to <Off>.

If <On> is displayed, select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.

2Select <Manually Acquire>, and press .

3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).

Specify the settings in the following order: <IP Address> <Subnet Mask> <Gateway Address>.

Enter each setting using the numeric keys, and press on each screen.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

189

Checking whether the settings are correct

Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ). If

a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel ( Testing the

Network Connection(P. 190) ).

Testing the Network Connection

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.

4Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and press .

If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown above.

LINKS

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 191)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

190

Setting IPv6 Addresses

15A8-03U

The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before

setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4

Settings(P. 194) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.

Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not

available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use up to nine of the following

IPv6 addresses:

Type Maximum

number

available

Description

Link-local address 1 An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to

communicate with devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set

when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled.

Manual address 1 An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex

length and default router address.

Stateless address 6 An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine

and the network prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are

discarded when the machine is restarted (or turned ON).

Stateful address 1 An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

191

4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].

5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.

[Use IPv6]

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

192

Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Use Stateless Address]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Use Manual Address]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex

length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[IP Address]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with «ff» (or multicast address) cannot be entered.

[Prex Length]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with «ff» (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

6Click [OK].

Checking whether the settings are correct

Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the

machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

Using the operation panel

IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> screen. IPv6 Settings(P. 291)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

193

Viewing Network Settings

15A8-03W

Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 194)

Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 194)

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 194)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 195)

The IP address is not correctly congured if it is displayed as «0.0.0.0».

Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP

address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine

starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 211)

You can print a list of the current network settings. Output Reports(P. 297)

Viewing IPv4 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view

Viewing IPv6 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN

1Press .

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

194

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>, and press .

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .

If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .

4Read the message that is displayed, and press .

5Select <Wireless LAN Information>, and press .

6Select the setting to view, and press .

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

195

Viewing WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information

1Select <Security Settings>, and press .

2Conrm and select the current security setting, and press .

If the security settings are not congured, <None> is displayed.

3Select the setting to view, and press .

WEP WPA/WPA2-PSK

<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from . Press

<Network Information> <Network Connection Method> and select the setting to view.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 191)

Conguring DNS(P. 212)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

196

Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer

15A8-03X

When using the machine as a network printer, you can congure the protocols and ports used for printing and create

a print server for the machine. Before conguring the machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup

procedures, including the printer driver installation. For more information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.»

Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be

selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment.

Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are

often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

197

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions

15A8-03Y

Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. The protocols supported

by the machine include LPD, RAW, and WSD (Web Services on Devices).

To change protocols’ port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 241) .

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Congure printing protocols.

Conguring LPD or RAW

1Click [Edit] in [LPD Print Settings] or [RAW Print Settings].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

198

2Congure the settings as necessary.

[Use LPD Printing]

Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Use RAW Printing]

Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

3Click [OK].

Conguring WSD

1Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].

2Congure the settings as necessary.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

199

[Use WSD Printing]

Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Use WSD Browsing]

Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is

automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Use WSD Scanning]

Available for Windows Vista/7/8/10, WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without

installing the scanner driver. Select the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD

scanning, clear the check box.

[Use Computer Scanning]

Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check

box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, press

(COPY/SCAN) and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination ( Scanning from the

Machine(P. 130) ).

[Use Multicast Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is

cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the

network.

3Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> screen.

LPD Print Settings(P. 293)

RAW Print Settings(P. 293)

WSD Settings(P. 293)

Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8/10

The WSD printer and scanner can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying

the Printer Folder(P. 434) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions.

For more information about how to install MF Drivers for the WSD network printer, see «MF Driver

Installation Guide.»

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 201)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

200

Conguring Printer Ports

15A8-040

Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via

the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an

incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the

document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the

computer.

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).

3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

201

Adding a port

If the IP address of the machine has been changed, add a new port. Adding a port is also an effective solution

when an incorrect port type was selected in the Windows printer folder during the printer driver installation.

1Click [Add Port].

2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

3Click [Auto Detect], select the machine when it is detected, and click [Next].

If the machine is not detected

Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, click [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC

address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 194) ), and then click [Next].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

202

4Click [Add] [Finish].

5Click [Close].

Changing the port type or number

If the printing protocols ( Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 198) ) or port numbers

( Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 241) ) have been changed on the machine, the

corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This change is only available for LPR or

RAW ports.

1Click [Congure Port].

2Click the [LPR] or [RAW] radio button in [Protocol Type], change the number in the [Port Number] text box

as necessary, and then click [OK].

4Click [Close].

LINKS

Setting Up Print Server(P. 204)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

203

Setting Up Print Server

15A8-041

With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each

computer to install MF Drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each

computer by using the provided DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure the

settings for sharing the printer.

To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.

You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit

architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.

When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.

To obtain device information when using a print server

Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. For more

information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.»

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).

3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the

machine.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

204

When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed

Click [Change Sharing Options]. If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] (or [Continue]).

4Install additional drivers as necessary.

This operation is required if you want to install MF Drivers in other computers running a different bit

architecture via the print server.

1Click [Additional Drivers].

2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].

Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

205

Print server Select the check box for

32-bit operating systems [x64]

64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]

If you do not know whether your Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012 is a 32-bit or 64-bit

operating system, see Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 437) .

3Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that

contains MF Drivers, and then click [OK].

* Specify the folder for your language in [xxxx].

If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] or [PCL] [XXXX]* [x64]

[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.

If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] or [PCL] [XXXX]* [32bit]

[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

5Click [OK].

Installing MF Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server

1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the

Print Server(P. 435)

2Double-click the shared printer.

3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

LINKS

Printing from a Computer(P. 86)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

206

Conguring the Machine for Your Network

Environment

15A8-042

The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. Specify the settings necessary to suit

your network environment.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

207

Conguring Ethernet Settings

15A8-043

Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set the communication mode

(half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). In general, the machine can be used without

changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 296) ), but you can change these settings to suit your network

environment.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings> <Auto Detect>.

4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.

Conguring Ethernet settings automatically

Select <On>, and press . The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the

Ethernet type that can be used.

Conguring Ethernet settings manually

1Select <Off>, and press .

2Select the communication mode.

Select <Communication Mode> select <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex> .

<Half Duplex>

Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a

networking device using half duplex.

<Full Duplex>

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

208

3Select the Ethernet type.

Select <Ethernet Type> select <10BASE-T> or <100BASE-TX> .

4Select <Apply>, and press .

LINKS

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 210)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 211)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

209

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit

15A8-044

In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of

data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each

network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.

4Select the MTU, and press .

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 208)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 211)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

210

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network

15A8-045

When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a

mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,

communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network

devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the

network.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>, and press .

4Enter the wait time in seconds, and press .

Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time.

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 208)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 210)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

211

Conguring DNS

15A8-046

DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP

address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring

DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Congure DNS settings.

Conguring IPv4 DNS

1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

212

2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Host Name]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to

the DNS server.

[Domain Name]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such

as «example.com.»

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is

changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS

Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the

[mDNS Name] text box.

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire Host Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP

server.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

213

3Click [OK].

Conguring IPv6 DNS

1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].

2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.

The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6

Addresses(P. 191)

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with «ff» (or multicast address) cannot be

entered.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with «ff» (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

214

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Host Name]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to

the DNS server.

[Domain Name]

Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such

as «example.com.»

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine’s IP address is

changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the

check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless

Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic

Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the

check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> screen. IPv4 Settings(P. 290) IPv6 Settings(P. 291)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 191)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

215

Conguring SNTP

15A8-047

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by

using the time server on the network. The protocol is typically used for synchronizing

the machine and a server. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time

(UTC), so specify the time zone setting before conguring SNTP ( Date/Time

Settings(P. 303) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.

The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

216

5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use SNTP]

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

[NTP Server Name]

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host

name (or FQDN) of up to 255 alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

[Polling Interval]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next. Specify an interval from 1 to 48 hours.

6Click [OK].

Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server

You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network

Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings] that appears. If a

proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation

does not adjust the system clock.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

217

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP

15A8-048

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced

SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.

You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your

network environment and the purpose of use.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called «community» to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this

information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to

ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.

Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Enabling TLS Encrypted

Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ).

The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.

To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 241) .

SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,

monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction

manuals for your management software.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

218

3Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify SNMPv1 settings.

If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

219

[Use SNMPv1]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear

the check box.

[Community Name]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Use Dedicated Community]

Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software.

Select the check box to use Dedicated Community. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the

check box.

6Specify SNMPv3 settings.

If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

220

[Use SNMPv3]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Enable User]

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,

clear the corresponding check box.

[User Name]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Security Settings]

Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/

Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Authentication Algorithm]

If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security

Settings], select the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.

[Encryption Algorithm]

If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings], select the algorithm that

corresponds to your environment.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter between 6 and 16 alphanumeric characters

for the password in the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter

the same password in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and

encryption algorithms.

[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.

7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

221

With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be

monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.

To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

8Click [OK].

Disabling SNMPv1

Some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine information via the

printer driver.

Using the operation panel

You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from <Menu> screen. SNMP

Settings(P. 294)

Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to

[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in

SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features

that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LINKS

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249)

Network (MF244dw / MF232w)

222

Security

Security ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 224

Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access …………………………………………………………………………… 225

Preventing Unauthorized Access …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 226

Setting Access Privileges ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 228

Setting the System Manager PIN …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 229

Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………….. 231

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………….. 233

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ………………………………………………………………………………… 234

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules …………………………………………………………………………….. 238

Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………….. 241

Setting a Proxy (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 243

Restricting the Machine’s Functions (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………. 245

Disabling HTTP Communication ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 246

Disabling Remote UI ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 247

Implementing Robust Security Features (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………… 248

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI ………………………………………………………………. 249

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication …………………………………………………………………………………………. 252

Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ………………………………………………………………… 257

Generating Key Pairs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 259

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ……………………………………………………………………… 266

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ………………………………………………………………………………… 269

Security

223

Security

15A8-049

Condential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of

these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized

access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur

unanticipated losses when your condential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped

with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.

You can congure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on

your in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine’s security

features. Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 226)

Establishing the Basics of Information Security

Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 225)

Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse

Restricting the Machine’s Functions (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 245)

Implementing Robust Security Features

Implementing Robust Security Features (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 248)

Security

224

Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access

15A8-04A

Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security

measures, such as using rewalls and changing port numbers.

Security

225

Preventing Unauthorized Access

15A8-04C

This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is

a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines

connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a

variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,

and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to

reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to

threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary

settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected

to the network.

Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network

Assigning a Private IP Address (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 226)

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 227)

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 227)

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 227)

Assigning a Private IP Address (MF244dw / MF232w)

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A «global IP address» is

used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a «private IP address» is used for the communication

within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/

multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage

due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,

your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local

area network, such as a LAN in the company.

Global IP Address

Can be accessed from the external network

Private IP Address

Can be accessed from the users within a local area network

Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,

assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is

found in one of the following ranges.

Ranges for Private IP addresses

From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188) .

If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment

to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents

Security

226

access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/

multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission (MF244dw / MF232w)

A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/

intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the

external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the

external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP

address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Rules(P. 234) .

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (MF244dw / MF232w)

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features (MF244dw /

MF232w)(P. 248) , and on the procedures to specify, see Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote

UI(P. 249) .

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to

information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine

enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Setting PIN to Each Function

Setting PIN for Using Remote UI

For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 231) .

Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings

For more information, see Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229) .

Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on

the other security measures, see Security(P. 224) and take necessary security measures for preventing

unauthorized access to suit your environment.

Security

227

Setting Access Privileges

15A8-04E

Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. When

privileges are set, the user must enter a PIN to change settings or access the Remote UI.

Access privileges are divided into two types: System Manager Mode and General User Mode. System Manager Mode

has full access privileges, and a System Manager PIN can be set to restrict logon in this mode. And by setting a Remote

UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI in General User Mode and in System Manager Mode without a

System Manager PIN set.

System Manager PIN

System Manager PIN is intended exclusively for Administrators having full access privileges. If you specify this

PIN, you need to log on to the machine using this PIN in order to access <Network Settings> or <System

Management Settings>. Set the System Manager PIN when you need different access privilege levels for

administrators and general users.

Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.

Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 231)

Security

228

Setting the System Manager PIN

15A8-04F

Set a System Manager PIN that is intended exclusively for Administrators. You can access <Network Settings>, <System

Management Settings>, etc. only when the PIN has been entered correctly. It is recommended that only

Administrators know the PIN.

1Press .

2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .

3Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager PIN>.

4Specify the System Manager PIN.

Enter a number of up to seven digits using the numeric keys, and press .

When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.

You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as «00» or «0000000».

To disable the PIN, press to erase the PIN (leave the text box blank), and press .

Setting the System Manager Name

1Select <System Manager Name>, and press .

2Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name, select <Apply>, and press . Entering

Text(P. 35)

Security

229

Conguring settings via the Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [System

Management] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.

By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,

Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as to the settings that you can

register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]

page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 280)

If PIN is forgotten

Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

If a System Manager PIN is Set

If you try to access <Network Settings>, <System Management

Settings>, etc., the following screen is displayed. Enter the set PIN.

Entering a PIN is also required when logging on in System Manager

Mode in the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

Security

230

Setting a Remote UI PIN

15A8-04H

You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.

Security

231

[Use Remote UI Access PIN]

If you select this check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.

[Set/Change PIN]

To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Conrm]

text boxes.

6Click [OK].

If PIN is forgotten

Set a new Remote UI Access PIN in the settings menu on the operation panel. Remote UI Settings(P. 333)

If Remote UI settings are initialized

The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu(P. 397)

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 228)

Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

Security

232

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls

15A8-04J

Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Security

233

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules

15A8-04K

You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP

addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.

The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].

4Click [Edit] for the lter type that you want to use.

Security

234

[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]

Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.

[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]

Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

[Blocked Addresses]

Register addresses to be blocked, as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses.

[Allowed Addresses]

Register addresses to be allowed, as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses.

1Select the [Use Filter] check box.

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2Specify the address.

Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click

[Add].

Security

235

Registered address Result

[Blocked Addresses]

Restricts communication (received) with devices having their IP addresses entered

for [Address to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP

addresses.

[Allowed Addresses]

Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses entered

for [Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP

addresses.

Registered as both

Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses

registered in [Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any

other IP addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also

registered in [Blocked Addresses].

Check for entry errors

If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,

in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>. IPv4 Address

Filter (P. 331) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 332)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods.

192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric

characters with colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the

addresses.

IPv4:

192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

IPv6:

fe80::10-fe80::20

Specifying a range of addresses with a

prex (IPv6 only)

Enter the address, followed by

a slash and a number

indicating the prex length.

fe80::1234/64

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

Select an IP address and click [Delete].

3Click [OK].

Security

236

You can enable or disable the IP Address Filter settings from <Menu>. IPv4 Address Filter (P. 331) IPv6

Address Filter (P. 332)

LINKS

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 238)

Security

237

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules

15A8-04L

You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC

addresses but permit other communications. Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specied.

This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].

4Click [Edit].

Security

238

[Inbound Filter]

Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

1Select the [Use Filter] check box.

Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2Specify the address.

Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add]. Allows communication

(received) only with devices having registered MAC addresses, and restricts communication with

devices with any other MAC addresses.

You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

Check for entry errors

If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the

Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. MAC Address Filter (P. 332)

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions

Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

3Click [OK].

Security

239

You can enable or disable the MAC Address Filter settings from <Menu>. MAC Address Filter (P. 332)

LINKS

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 234)

Security

240

Changing Port Numbers

15A8-04R

Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for

major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are

well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has

been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.

Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 243) .

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.

4Select a port, and press .

Learning more about the ports

<LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 198)

<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 218)

5Enter the port number using the numeric keys, and press .

LINKS

Security

241

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 201)

Security

242

Setting a Proxy

15A8-04S

A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other

devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The

client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the

resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks

but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use

Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make

sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and

password for authentication.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].

Security

243

5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use Proxy]

Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

[HTTP Proxy Server Address]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]

Change the port number as necessary. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.

[Use Proxy within Same Domain]

Select the check box to use a proxy server specied in the same domain.

[Use Proxy Authentication]

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric

characters for the user name in the [User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and

enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

6Click [OK].

Security

244

Restricting the Machine’s Functions

15A8-04U

Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,

the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

Disabling HTTP Communication and Remote Management

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 247)

Security

245

Disabling HTTP Communication

15A8-04W

HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you

are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party

intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing

with Google Cloud Print.

1Press .

2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP>.

4Select <Off>, and press .

<Off>

Disables HTTP communication.

<On>

Enables HTTP communication.

LINKS

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 272)

Changing Port Numbers (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 241)

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 198)

Security

246

Disabling Remote UI

15A8-04X

The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use

the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If you do not need to use the Remote

UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the

network by malicious third parties.

1Press .

2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

3Select <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI>.

4Select <Off>, and press .

<Off>

Disables the Remote UI.

<On>

Enables the Remote UI.

LINKS

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 272)

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

Security

247

Implementing Robust Security Features

15A8-04Y

Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,

and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these

attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

TLS Encrypted Communication

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine

from a computer via the Remote UI. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249)

IEEE 802.1X Authentication

IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively

managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must

go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.

Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication

to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)

blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client

device. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

LINKS

Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 257)

Security

248

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote

UI

15A8-050

You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer

Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when

the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP) or SNMPv3. To use TLS for the

Remote UI, you need to set a key pair and enable the TLS function. Generate or install the key pair for TLS before

enabling TLS ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 257) ).

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Key and Certicate] in [TLS Settings].

Security

249

5Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link

under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 269)

6Enable TLS for the Remote UI.

1Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].

2Click [Edit].

Security

250

3Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].

Using the operation panel

You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu>. Use TLS(P. 331)

Starting the Remote UI with TLS

If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the

security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed

to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

LINKS

Generating Key Pairs(P. 259)

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 218)

Security

251

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication

15A8-051

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server

(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a

device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that

the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,

which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,

a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.

Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certicate

before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266) ).

TLS

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A

key pair issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the

machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a

CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.

TTLS

This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate for

the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with

PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ).

PEAP

The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable

TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Enabling TLS Encrypted

Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ).

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

Security

252

3Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text

box, and specify the required settings.

Security

253

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Login Name]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.

Setting TLS

1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].

2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use for the client authentication.

Viewing details of a key pair or certicate

You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 269)

Setting TTLS/PEAP

1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.

Security

254

Internal protocol for TTLS

You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.

2Click [Change User Name/Password].

To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check

box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.

3Set the user name/password and click [OK].

Security

255

[User Name]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the

new password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.

6Click [OK].

7Restart the machine.

Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

Using the operation panel

You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu>. IEEE 802.1X Settings(P. 296)

LINKS

Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 257)

Security

256

Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital

Certicates

15A8-052

In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an

unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures

secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sning, spoong, and

tampering of data as it ows over a network.

Key Pair

A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or

decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be

returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure

communication of data over the network. A key pair is used for TLS encrypted communication

or TLS of the IEEE 802.1X authentication. Up to ve key pairs (including the preinstalled pairs)

can be generated to the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital

Certicates(P. 266) ). A key pair can be generated with the machine ( Generating Key

Pairs(P. 259) ).

CA Certicate

Digital certicates including CA certicates are similar to other forms of identication, such as

driver’s licenses. A digital certicate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to

detect any spoong or tampering of data. It is extremely dicult for third parties to abuse

digital certicates. A digital certicate that contains a public key of a certication authority (CA)

is referred to as a CA certicate. CA certicates are used for verifying the device the machine is

communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X

authentication. Up to 67 CA certicates can be registered, including the 62 certicates that are

preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266) ).

Key and Certicate Requirements

The certicate contained in a key pair generated with the machine conforms to X.509v3. If you install a key pair or a CA

certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Format Key pair: PKCS#12*1

CA certicate: X.509v1 or X.509v3, DER (encoded binary), PEM

File extension Key pair: «.p12» or «.pfx»

CA certicate: «.cer»

Public key algorithm

(and key length)

RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits)

Certicate signature algorithm SHA1-RSA, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA*2, SHA512-RSA*2, MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA

Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1

*1 Requirements for the certicate contained in a key pair are pursuant to CA certicates.

*2 SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.

Security

257

The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).

Security

258

Generating Key Pairs

15A8-053

A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer

Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Up to ve key pairs (including the

preinstalled pairs) can be generated to the machine. Self-signed certicates are used with key pairs generated in

«Network Communication». With a «Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)», you can apply for a CA-issued digital

certicate for the key pair generated by the machine.

Generate Network Communication Key(P. 259)

Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 261)

Generate Network Communication Key

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Security

259

Deleting a registered key pair

Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].

A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when «[TLS]» or «[IEEE

802.1X]» is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before

deleting it.

5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and certicate.

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in a list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

Security

260

[Key Algorithm]

RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the

number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.

[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature

Algorithm].

[Certicate Settings]

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity start date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2099, in the

order of: year, month, day.

[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity end date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 31/12/2099, in the

order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as «US»

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. «Common

Name» is often abbreviated as «CN.»

7Click [OK].

Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.

After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.

Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

Security

261

3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key pair

Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].

A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when «[TLS]» or «[IEEE

802.1X]» is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before

deleting it.

5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and certicate.

Security

262

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in a list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the

number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.

[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature

Algorithm].

[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as «US»

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. «Common

Name» is often abbreviated as «CN.»

7Click [OK].

Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.

8Click [Store in File].

A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].

Security

263

The Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) le is stored on the computer.

9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.

Registering the CA-issued Digital Certicate

You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certicate Signing Request (CSR) until the certicate is registered. Once

the certication authority has issued the digital certicate, register it using the procedure below.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in Administrator mode.

Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] for the certicate to be registered.

5Click [Register Certicate].

Security

264

6Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and click [Register].

LINKS

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 269)

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249)

Security

265

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates

15A8-054

Key pairs and digital certicates can be obtained from a certication authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can

store and then register these les by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certicate satisfy the

requirements of the machine ( Key and Certicate Requirements(P. 257) ). Up to ve key pairs (including the

preinstalled key pairs) and up to 67 CA certicates (including the 62 preinstalled certicates) can be registered.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].

Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA certicate.

4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].

Security

266

Deleting a registered key pair or CA certicate

Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot

delete the preinstalled CA certicates.

A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when «[TLS]» or «[IEEE

802.1X]» is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before

deleting it. The preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted.

Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates

Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate

again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.

5Click [Install].

Deleting a key pair or CA certicate le

Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].

6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].

The key pair or CA certicate is installed in the machine.

7Register the key pair or CA certicate.

Security

267

Registering a key pair

1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.

2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].

[Key Name]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.

[Password]

Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be

registered.

Registering a CA certicate

Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate you want to register.

LINKS

Generating Key Pairs(P. 259)

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 269)

Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Security

268

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates

15A8-055

Once key pairs and CA certicates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity

and signature.

1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].

Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to verify a CA certicate.

4Click the icon for the key pair or certicate that you want to verify.

Security

269

Certicate details can be viewed on this screen.

5Check the details of the certicate, and click [Verify Certicate].

The result from verifying the certicate is displayed as shown below.

LINKS

Generating Key Pairs(P. 259)

Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)

Security

270

Using Remote UI (MF244dw /

MF232w)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………………… 272

Starting Remote UI …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 273

Remote UI Screens ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 275

Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status …………………………………………………………………… 278

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ………………………………………………………………………………………… 282

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

271

Using Remote UI

15A8-056

Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the

status of the machine. You can also make some settings such as security. You can do this without leaving your desk,

making system management easier.

Functions of the Remote UI

Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 278)

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 282)

Basics of the Remote UI

Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

Remote UI Screens(P. 275)

System Requirements

The following environment is required to use the Remote UI. In addition, set the Web browser to enable

Cookies.

Windows

Windows Vista/7/8/10

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later

Mac OS

Mac OS 10.6 or later (except for Classic environment)

Safari 3.2.1 or later

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

272

Starting Remote UI

15A8-057

To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.

Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 194) ). If you have any

questions, ask your Network Administrator.

1Start the Web browser.

2Enter «http://(the IP address of the machine)/» in the address eld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://

[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

If a security alert is displayed

A security alert may be displayed if communication with an Apple device is encrypted ( Enabling TLS

Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no

errors, continue browsing the Web site.

A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Enabling TLS

Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 249) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no

errors, continue browsing the website.

3Log on to the Remote UI.

When a System Manager PIN is not set

Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].

[System Manager Mode]

You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate PIN in [System Manager

PIN] ( Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229) ). If [System Manager PIN] is not set, you do not need

to input anything.

[General User Mode]

You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If

you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

273

name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or

computer logon name.

[Remote UI Access PIN]

If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 231)

When a System Manager PIN is set

Enter the registered [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

4Click [Log In].

Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 275)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

274

Remote UI Screens

15A8-058

This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.

Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 275)

[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 276)

[Settings/Registration] Page(P. 277)

Portal Page (Main Page)

[Log Out]

Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

[Mail to System Manager]

Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]

under [System Management].

Refresh Icon

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

Device Basic Information

Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the

Error Information page will be displayed.

Consumables Information

Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.

Click [Check Consumables Details] to display the screen for checking consumables. Checking

Consumables(P. 279)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

275

Support Link

Displays the support link specied in [Device Information] under [System Management].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

Displays the status of the current print documents and history of print and copy documents. You can also

check the status of the machine.

[Settings/Registration]

Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can change

the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 282)

[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page

[To Portal]

Returns to Portal Page (main page).

Menu

Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the

Machine Status(P. 278)

Breadcrumb Trail

Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is

currently displayed.

Refresh Icon

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

Top Icon

Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

276

[Settings/Registration] Page

[To Portal]

Returns to Portal Page (main page).

Menu

Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote

UI(P. 282)

Breadcrumb Trail

Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is

currently displayed.

Top Icon

Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.

System Management Settings

You can only set [System Management Settings] when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.

When you have logged on in General User Mode, only [System Management] will be displayed.

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

277

Managing Documents and Checking the Machine

Status

15A8-059

Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 278)

Checking Error Information(P. 279)

Checking Consumables(P. 279)

Checking Maximum Print Speed(P. 279)

Checking System Manager Information(P. 280)

Checking Print Total Counter(P. 280)

The document le name displays only 255 characters. The printed application name may be added to the le

name.

Checking Current Status of Print Documents

The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]

You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].

If you logged on in System Manager Mode, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to

be printed will be listed.

If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only

be displayed on the documents that you printed.

Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user

name and the page count of the printed document.

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

278

Checking Error Information

When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on

Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 275)

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error

Information]

Checking Consumables

Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click

[Check Consumables Details] in Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 275) to display this page.

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel]

[Consumables]

Checking Maximum Print Speed

The maximum print speed is displayed.

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

279

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device

Features]

Checking System Manager Information

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]

on the [Settings/Registration] page. System Management Settings(P. 330)

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device

Information]

Checking Print Total Counter

The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy and print functions is displayed.

Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 273) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check

Counter]

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

280

LINKS

Remote UI Screens(P. 275)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

281

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI

15A8-05A

You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the

machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.

Some settings require you to rst log on in System Manager Mode before you can change them.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 273)

2Click [Settings/Registration].

3Click the menu item you want to set, then click [Edit].

For more information about the settings menu, see each item below

Menu items Referents

Preferences

Paper Settings Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Display Settings Preferences(P. 300)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

282

Menu items Referents

Timer Settings Timer Settings(P. 303)

Function Settings

Common Settings Common Settings (MF244dw)(P. 308)

Copy Settings Copy Settings(P. 310)

Printer Settings Printer Settings(P. 314)

System Management Settings

System Management System Management Settings(P. 330)

Network Settings Network (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 165)

Security Settings Security(P. 224)

Initialize Setting Information Initializing Menu(P. 397)

LINKS

Remote UI Screens(P. 275)

Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

283

Setting Menu List

Setting Menu List …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 285

Direct Connection (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 286

Network Settings (MF244dw / MF232w) …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 287

Output Reports ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 297

Preferences …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 300

Timer Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 303

Common Settings (MF244dw) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 308

Copy Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 310

Scan Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 312

Printer Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 314

Adjustment/Maintenance ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 324

System Management Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 330

Setting Menu List

284

Setting Menu List

15A8-05C

There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Access these settings by

pressing .

You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: Output Reports(P. 297)

Setting Menu List

285

Direct Connection

15A8-05E

Make a direct connection between a mobile device and the machine. Using

the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Settings for Direct Connection can be specied from Direct Connection

Settings (P. 289) .

Setting Menu List

286

Network Settings

15A8-05F

All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting the

System Manager PIN(P. 229)

Select Wired/Wireless LAN(P. 287)

Wireless LAN Settings(P. 287)

Direct Connection Settings (P. 289)

TCP/IP Settings(P. 290)

SNMP Settings(P. 294)

Dedicated Port Settings(P. 295)

Waiting Time for Connection at Startup(P. 296)

Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 296)

IEEE 802.1X Settings(P. 296)

Initialize Network Settings(P. 296)

Select Wired/Wireless LAN

When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when

switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using

the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 168)

Wired LAN

Wireless LAN

Wireless LAN Settings

Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the

setting for saving power consumption. See «Getting Started» Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425) .

SSID Settings

Select to congure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by

inputting manually from the operation panel.

Select Access Point

Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.

You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting

a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Menu List

287

Enter Manually

Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify

authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed

Settings(P. 180)

Security Settings

None

WEP

Open System

Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4

Edit WEP Key

Shared Key

Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4

Edit WEP Key

WPA/WPA2-PSK

Auto

AES-CCMP

WPS Push Button Mode

Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting

Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 172)

WPS PIN Code Mode

Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 174)

Power Save Mode

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

Off

On

<Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed

message <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>

Wireless LAN Information

Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

MAC Address

Wireless LAN Status

Latest Error Information

Channel

SSID Settings

Security Settings

Power Save Mode

Setting Menu List

288

Direct Connection Settings

Congure settings for Direct Connection. After conguring settings, you can connect to the machine directly and

wirelessly from a mobile device even without an access point or wireless LAN router.

Use Direct Connection

Select whether to use Direct Connection. You can select <Direct Connection Only> or <Wireless LAN/Direct Conn.

(Auto Switch)> when <Use Direct Connection> is set to <On> while the Wirelss LAN connection is enabled.

Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Off

On

Direct Connection Only

Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)

<Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Use Direct

Connection> <On> Select <Direct Connection Only> or <Wireless LAN/Direct

Conn. (Auto Switch)> when <Wireless LAN> is selected in <Select Wired/Wireless

LAN>

Time Until Direct Connection Termination

Set the time that the machine exits Direct Connection mode automatically. Can be set when <Use Direct

Connection> is <On>. Once the time set in <Time Until Direct Connection Termination> is reached,

communication between the machine and a mobile device is discontinued. Before starting a large print job, you

should set a long delay time or set the delay time to <0> (Off).

0 (Off)

1 to 10 to 60 (min.)

<Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Time Until Direct

Connection Termination> Set time to disconnect

Access Point Mode Settings

To make detailed settings, such as authentication and encryption, enter an SSID and network key to congure

settings. Can be set when <Use Direct Connection> is <On>.

Use Custom SSID

Off

On

SSID (1-20 Characters)

Setting Menu List

289

Use Custom Network Key

Off

On

Network Key (10 Char.)

<Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode

Settings> Select <Use Custom SSID> or <Use Custom Network Key> <On>

Set SSID Settings or Network Key Settings <Apply>

TCP/IP Settings

Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.

IPv4 Settings

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.

IP Address Settings

Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP

network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 188)

Auto Acquire

Select Protocol

Off

DHCP

BOOTP

RARP

Auto IP

Off

On

Manually Acquire

IP Address: 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0

Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0

Check Settings

Auto Acquire

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

PING Command

Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network

Connection(P. 190)

DNS Settings

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P. 212)

Setting Menu List

290

DNS Server Settings

Primary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0

Secondary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0

DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings

Host Name

Domain Name

DNS Dynamic Update Settings

Off

On

DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

mDNS Settings

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 212)

Off

On

mDNS Name

DHCP Option Settings

Select whether to acquire the host name and whether to use the dynamic update function via the DHCP

options when DHCP is enabled. Conguring DNS(P. 212)

Acquire Host Name

Off

On

DNS Dynamic Update

Off

On

IPv6 Settings

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.

Use IPv6

Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6

Addresses(P. 191)

Off

On

Check Settings

Link-Local Address

Prex Length

Stateless Address Settings

Enable or disable stateless addresses. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 191)

Off

Setting Menu List

291

On

Check Settings

Stateless Address

Prex Length

Use DHCPv6

Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 191)

Off

On

Check Settings

Stateful Address

Prex Length

DNS Settings

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P. 212)

DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings

Use IPv4 Host/Domain

Off

Host Name

Domain Name

On

DNS Dynamic Update Settings

Off

On

Register Manual Address

Off

On

Register Stateful Address

Off

On

Register Stateless Address

Off

On

DNS Dynamic Update Interval

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

mDNS Settings

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 212)

Off

On

Use IPv4 Name for mDNS

Setting Menu List

292

Off

mDNS Name

On

LPD Print Settings

Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 198)

Off

On

RAW Print Settings

Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD

Functions(P. 198)

Off

On

WSD Settings

Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD

protocol that is available on Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012. Conguring Printing Protocols

and WSD Functions(P. 198)

WSD Print Settings

Use WSD Print

Off

On

Use WSD Browsing

Off

On

WSD Scan Settings

Use WSD Scan

Off

On

Use Computer Scan

Off

On

Use Multicast Discovery

Off

On

Use HTTP

Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote

UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

Off

On

Setting Menu List

293

Port Number Settings

Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers

(MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 241)

LPD

1 to 515 to 65535

RAW

1 to 9100 to 65535

WSD Multicast Discovery

1 to 3702 to 65535

HTTP

1 to 80 to 65535

SNMP

1 to 161 to 65535

MTU Size

Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission

Unit(P. 210)

1300

1400

1500

SNMP Settings

Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 218)

SNMPv1 Settings

Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to

Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

Off

On

Community Name 1 Settings

Off

On

Community Name

MIB Access Permission

Community Name 2 Settings

Off

On

Community Name

MIB Access Permission

Setting Menu List

294

Dedicated Community Settings

Off

On

<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings>

<SNMPv1 Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Specify settings if <On> is

selected

SNMPv3 Settings

Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is

enabled.

Off

On

<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3

Settings> Select <Off> or <On>

Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host

Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running

SNMP-compatible software.

Off

On

<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info.

from Host> Select <Off> or <On>

Dedicated Port Settings

Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing or scanning uses MF Scan Utility and

when browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.

Off

On

Setting Menu List

295

<Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or

<On>

Waiting Time for Connection at Startup

Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a

Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 211)

0 to 300 (sec.)

Ethernet Driver Settings

Select the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).

You can also view the MAC address of the machine.

Auto Detect

Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 208)

Off

Communication Mode

Half Duplex

Full Duplex

Ethernet Type

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

On

MAC Address

Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing

the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 194)

IEEE 802.1X Settings

Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Off

On

Initialize Network Settings

Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Menu(P. 337)

Setting Menu List

296

Output Reports

15A8-05H

You can check the list of the settings as well as the content that has been

registered in the machine by printing a User Data List.

Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with «*1» are only available for MF244dw / MF232w.

Settings marked with «*2» are only available for MF244dw.

Consumables Status Report

You can check the consumables status installed in the machine.

<Output Reports> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size

of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>

Example:

Setting Menu List

297

Eco Report *1

You can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power, and also

check ways to increase savings.

<Output Reports> <Eco Report> Check that the size of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>

Example:

User Data List

You can check a list of the machine‘s setting items (setting menu list) and their settings.

<Output Reports> <User Data List> Check that the size of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>

Example:

Setting Menu List

298

PCL Font List *2

You can print a list to check the fonts available in PCL mode.

<Output Reports> <PCL Font List> Check that the size of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>

Example:

Setting Menu List

299

Preferences

15A8-05J

All the settings about the display are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with «*1» are only available for the MF244dw.

Settings marked with «*2» have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.

Settings marked with «*3» are only available for the MF244dw / MF232w.

Display Settings

Contrast

Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.

Five Levels

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Contrast> Use /

to adjust the brightness

Invert Screen Colors

Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was

adjusted in <Contrast>.

Off

On

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen

Colors> Select <On> or <Off>

Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch

Select the unit of measurement.

Setting Menu List

300

Millimeter

Inch

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry

Switch> Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>

Notify to Check Paper Settings

Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading paper into the

paper drawer or manual feed slot.

Off

On

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings>

Select <Off> or <On>

Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area*1

When set to <On>, a message is displayed for dirt or soiling on the original scanning area.

Off

On

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Clean Original Scanning

Area> Select <Off> or <On>

Message Display Time

Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.

1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display

Time> Enter a number for the interval

Scrolling Speed

Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels.

Setting Menu List

301

Slow

Standard

Fast

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling

Speed> Select the speed

Cursor Movement Type

Congure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select <Auto> to automatically move

the cursor to the right of the entered character. Select <Manual> to manually move the cursor to the right of the

entered character.

Auto

Manual

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Cursor Movement

Type> Select <Auto> or <Manual>

Language*2

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.

Arabic, Basque, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese (Simplied), Chinese (Traditional), Croatian, Czech, Danish,

Dutch, English , Estonian, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian,

Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a

language

Remote UI Language*2 *3

Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

Chinese (Simplied), Chinese (Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English , Finnish, French, German,

Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish

<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI

Language> Select a language

Setting Menu List

302

Timer Settings

15A8-05K

All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

NOTE

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with «*1» are only available for the MF244dw / MF232w.

Settings marked with «*2» may be unavailable or have different defaults depending on the country or region

of purchase.

Quiet Mode Time(P. 303)

Date/Time Settings(P. 303)

Auto Sleep Time(P. 305)

Auto Reset Time(P. 305)

Function After Auto Reset(P. 306)

Auto Oine Time(P. 306)

Auto Shutdown Time(P. 307)

Quiet Mode Time *1

You can reduce the operation sound of the machine when you want it to run more quietly (quiet mode). Set a time for

the machine to enter quiet mode automatically. You can also set the machine to always run in quiet mode. Entering

Quiet Mode(P. 57)

Start Time

Off

On

Start time setting to enter quiet mode

End Time

Off

On

Stop time setting to exit quiet mode

Date/Time Settings *1

Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

Date Format *2

Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).

YYYY MM/DD

Setting Menu List

303

MM/DD/YYYY

DD/MM YYYY

<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date

Format> Select the date format

Time Format

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

12 Hour (AM/PM)

24 Hour

<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time

Format> Select the display setting

Current Date/Time Settings

Set the current date and time. Use / to move the cursor, and / to specify the date and time or

switch between <AM>/<PM>.

<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time

Settings> Set the date and time

The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.

Time Zone

Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also

changed accordingly.

(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West

to

(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time

to

Setting Menu List

304

(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati Island

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and

time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time

Zone> Select a time zone

Daylight Saving Time Settings *2

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to

which daylight saving time is in effect.

Off

On

Start: Month, Day

End: Month, Day

<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time

Settings> <On> Select a starting month and day

<Apply> Select an ending month and day <Apply>

Auto Sleep Time

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters

sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.

Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to

save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 59)

1 to 30 (min.)

Auto Reset Time

If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default

screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. Select <0> to disable the Auto Reset

function. The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases:

The setting menu is displayed.

The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.

Setting Menu List

305

An error message is displayed and the error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error

does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)

0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)

1 to 2 to 9 (min.)

<Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Set the Auto Reset time

The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.

Function After Auto Reset

Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is

selected, the display returns to the main screen for copy mode. If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns

to the main screen of the function that was selected.

Default Function

Selected Function

<Timer Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default

Function> or <Selected Function>

Auto Oine Time

If a key has not been pressed for a specied period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is set

online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the machine

becomes oine. You can also set the machine to remain online.

0 (The machine remains online.)

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

Setting Menu List

306

<Timer Settings> <Auto Oine Time> Set the time period

Auto Shutdown Time

Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after the specied period of idle time has elapsed since the

machine entered the sleep mode. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 61)

0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)

1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)

Setting Menu List

307

Common Settings

15A8-05L

All the settings about the operation of the paper drawer and the paper feed

method are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

Switch Paper Feed Method

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change

how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing.

However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-

sided printing. For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 51) .

Multi-Purpose Tray

Speed Priority

Print Side Priority

Drawer 1

Speed Priority

Print Side Priority

<Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method> Select the paper

source Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>

Paper Sources

Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.

<Speed Priority>

When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

Setting Menu List

308

<Print Side Priority>

To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-

sided printing is selected.

If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided

printing ( Paper(P. 419) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need

to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 51) ).

1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.

Setting Menu List

309

Copy Settings

15A8-05R

All the settings about the copy are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available for MF244dw.

Change Default Settings (P. 310)

Correct Density(P. 311)

Initialize Default Settings(P. 311)

Change Default Settings

You can change the factory default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the

copy function. Changing Default Settings(P. 83)

Number of Copies

1 to 999

Density

-4 to 0 to +4

Auto Density

Original Type

Text

Text/Photo (High Speed)

Text/Photo

Photo

2-Sided*

Off

1->2-Sided

Original/Finishing Type

Copy Ratio

Custom Ratio

100% (1:1)

400% (Max)

200%

141% A5->A4

70% A4->A5

50%

Setting Menu List

310

25% (Min)

N on 1

Off

2 on 1

4 on 1

ID Card Copy

Select Layout

Collate

Off

On

Sharpness

Seven Levels

Correct Density

Specify the initial copy density. You can also change the copy density temporarily. Adjusting Density(P. 72)

-4 to 0 to +4

<Copy Settings> <Correct Density> Adjust the density

Initialize Default Settings

Select this option to restore the default copy settings.

<Copy Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>

Setting Menu List

311

Scan Settings

15A8-05S

All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available for MF244dw.

Shortcut Key Settings

Register scan settings for the key (for MF232w, and keys). The settings include the computer

that scanned images are saved in, the type of scan (color or black and white), and the le format (PDF or JPEG).

Registering these settings enables you to scan documents into a specied computer just by pressing a button. You can

view the registered settings by selecting <Conrm Destination>. Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key(P. 133)

MF244dw / MF231

Register

Scan -> PC

Off

USB Connection

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Custom 1

Custom 2

Network Connection*

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Custom 1

Custom 2

Conrm Destination

Scan -> PC

MF232w

Register

Scan -> PC1

Off

USB Connection

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Setting Menu List

312

Custom 1

Custom 2

Network Connection

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Custom 1

Custom 2

Scan -> PC2

Off

USB Connection

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Custom 1

Custom 2

Network Connection

Color Scan

B&W Scan

Custom 1

Custom 2

Conrm Destination

Scan -> PC1

Scan -> PC2

Setting Menu List

313

Printer Settings

15A8-05U

All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions. Default

settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with «*1» are only available for the MF244dw / MF232w.

Settings marked with «*2» are only available for the MF244dw.

Priority of settings

If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the

specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the

operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when performing PCL printing and

printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.

Action When Paper Size Mismatch(P. 314)

Mobile Print Halftones(P. 315)

Copies(P. 315)

2-Sided Printing(P. 315)

Default Paper(P. 316)

Print Quality(P. 316)

Layout(P. 317)

Timeout(P. 318)

PCL(P. 319)

Action When Paper Size Mismatch

Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the paper source is selected. You can also

set the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message. When an Error Message

Appears(P. 347)

Force Output

Display Error

Setting Menu List

314

<Printer Settings> <Action When Paper Size Mismatch> Select <Force

Output> or <Display Error>

Mobile Print Halftones *1

Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device. Select <Gradation> for photos and illustrations, and

<Error Diffusion> for mostly text documents for more attractive printouts.

Gradation

Error Diffusion

<Printer Settings> <Mobile Print Halftones> Select <Gradation> or

<Error Diffusion>

Copies *2

Set the number of copies to print.

1 to 999

<Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of copies to print

2-Sided Printing *2

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.

Off

On

<Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

315

Default Paper *2

Use this item to specify the paper size. Paper(P. 419)

<Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the paper size

Print Quality

You can change settings related to print quality.

Density *2

Adjust the toner density.

17 Levels

Fine Adjust

High

17 Levels

Medium

17 Levels

Low

17 Levels

The settings specied for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.

<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density> Adjust the

density <Apply>

Toner Save

You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance

characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.

Off

On

Setting Menu List

316

<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select

<Off> or <On>

Special Print Mode *2

Select <Special Settings 1> if a printed bar code is unreadable, or <Special Settings 2> if print results are partially

faded.

Off

Special Settings 1

Special Settings 2

<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special Print Mode>

Select <Special Settings 1> or <Special Settings 2>

Resolution *2

Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.

1200 dpi

600 dpi

<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Resolution> Select

<1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>

Density Fine Adjustment *2

Finely adjust the density. You can specify this setting only when <1200 dpi> is selected in <Resolution>.

-1 to 0 to 1

<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine Adjustment>

Specify the density

Layout *2

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position.

Setting Menu List

317

Binding Location

If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on

the long or short edge.

Long Edge

Short Edge

<Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding Location> Select

<Long Edge> or <Short Edge>

<Long Edge>

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.

<Short Edge>

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.

Timeout *2

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception

interruption.

5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)

<Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time period

Setting Menu List

318

PCL *2

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

Paper Save

Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will

not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you

have inserted in your document, select <Off>.

Off

On

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select <Off> or

<On>

Orientation

Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.

Portrait

Landscape

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select <Portrait>

or <Landscape>

Font Number

Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font

samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 299)

0 to 54

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font Number> Select the font

number

Point Size

Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-

spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.

4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)

Setting Menu List

319

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify the point

size

Pitch

Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only

when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.

0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the pitch value

Form Lines

Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to

the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.

5 to 64 to 128 (lines)

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form Lines> Specify the

number of lines

Character Code

Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting is

ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.

DESKTOP

ISO4

ISO6

ISO11

ISO15

ISO17

ISO21

ISO60

ISO69

ISOL1

ISOL2

ISOL5

ISOL6

LEGAL

MATH8

MCTEXT

PC8

PC850

PC852

PC8DN

PC8TK

PC1004

PIFONT

PSMATH

PSTEXT

ROMAN8

VNINTL

VNMATH

VNUS

WIN30

WINBALT

WINL1

Setting Menu List

320

MSPUBL

PC775

WINL2

WINL5

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> Select the

character code

Custom Paper

Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and

<Y dimension>.

Off

On

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper> Select <Off> or

<On>

Unit of Measure

Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.

Millimeters

Inches

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure> Select

<Millimeters> or <Inches>

X dimension

Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.

77 to 216 (mm)

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension> Specify the

dimension

Y dimension

Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.

Setting Menu List

321

127 to 356 (mm)

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension> Specify the

dimension

Append CR to LF

Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is

selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If

<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.

Yes

No

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF> Select <Yes>

or <No>

Enlarge A4 Print Width

Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR

size.

Off

On

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width> Select

<Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

322

Halftones

You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and

darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of

image.

Text

Color Tone

Gradation

Resolution

Graphics

Color Tone

Gradation

Resolution

Image

Color Tone

Gradation

Resolution

<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> Select the type of

image Select the halftone reproduction method

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

<Color Tone>

Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data

such as photo image data.

<Gradation>

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

<Resolution>

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Setting Menu List

323

Adjustment/Maintenance

15A8-05W

All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short

descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available for the MF244dw / MF232w.

Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.(P. 324)

Toner Save(P. 324)

Special Processing(P. 325)

Clean Fixing Assembly (P. 329)

Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.

Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.

1 to 10 to 99 (%)

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>

Enter the toner cartridge level

Toner Save

Select whether to reduce toner consumption when copying.

Copy

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Toner

Save> <Copy> <On>

Setting Menu List

324

When set to <On>

Fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.

Special Processing

If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the

printouts.

Special Printing Mode U

If toner appears splattered around text and patterns in a printout, select <On>.

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode U> <On>

When set to <On>

Print quality can be affected by the type of paper (especially lightweight paper) and the printing environment

(especially high humidity).

Special Printing Mode V

Adjust this setting if the print paper curls or wrinkles.

Off

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 3

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode V> Select the mode

To enable the setting

Setting Menu List

325

This setting is enabled in the following conditions.

The paper size is set to <B5>, <A5>, <STMT>, or <EXEC>

<Paper Type> is set to <Plain (60-89 g/m²)>, <Plain L (60-89 g/m²)>, <Recycled (60-89 g/m²)>, <Color (60-89

g/m²)>, or <Envelope>

After the setting is enabled

Print speed is slower.

Special Printing Mode X *

Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper.

Off

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 3

Mode 4

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode X> Select the mode

Special Printing Mode Z

Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper output when copying.

Off

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 3

Mode 4

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode Z> Select the mode

After the setting is changed

Setting Menu List

326

By specifying <Off> or <Mode 1>, streaks may adhere to the print paper. By specifying <Mode 3> or <Mode 4>,

outlines may be blurred or images may appear somewhat grainy. The print density becomes lighter as the

setting progresses from <Off> to <Mode 4>.

After printing from a smartphone or tablet

If streaks adhere to the paper, change the setting with <Special Printing Mode Z>.

Special Printing Mode B

Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper after replacing the toner cartridge or after not printing

for a long period of time.

Off

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 3

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode B> Select the mode

After the setting is enabled

Print speed is slower.

Special Printing Mode C

Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper.

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode C> <On>

After the setting is enabled

While more effect is gained than with <Special Printing Mode Z>, print speed is slower.

Setting Menu List

327

Special Printing Mode D

Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper. Also, setting this item to <On> will reduce the operating

noise during printing.

Copy

Off

On

Print

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode D> Select <Copy> or <Print> <On>

After the setting is enabled

While more effect is gained than with <Special Printing Mode Z>, print speed is slower.

After printing from a smartphone or tablet

If streaks adhere to the paper, change the setting with <Special Printing Mode D> <Copy>.

Special Printing Mode I

Only select <On> if paper jams frequently when printing on lightweight paper or on curled paper.

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode I> <On>

When set to <On>

White patches may appear in images printed on paper other than lightweight paper.

Special Printing Mode J

If printing is uneven when printing ne lines or faint images, select <On>.

Off

On

Setting Menu List

328

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode J> <On>

When set to <On>.

The following may occur.

Denition may be affected

Toner appears in non-print areas when using a new toner cartridge

Toner cartridge may be used up more quickly

Special Printing Mode K

If toner does not adhere adequately and printouts are faded, select <On>.

Off

On

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing

Mode K> <On>

When set to <On>

Print speed is slower.

Clean Fixing Assembly

Clean the xing assembly after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Fixing

Assembly(P. 383)

Setting Menu List

329

System Management Settings

15A8-05X

All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short

descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

NOTE

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed

Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

Asterisks (*)

Settings marked with «*1» are only available for the MF244dw / MF232w.

Settings marked with «*2» have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.

Settings marked with «*3» are only available for the MF244dw.

«*4«: Displayed as <Display Consumables Info. (Toner Status)> for the MF231.

Network Settings(P. 330)

System Manager Information Settings(P. 330)

Device Information Settings(P. 331)

Security Settings(P. 331)

Select Country/Region(P. 332)

Remote UI Settings(P. 333)

Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 333)

Use as USB Device(P. 334)

Enable Product Extended Survey Program(P. 334)

Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)(P. 334)

Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 335)

PDL Selection (Plug and Play) (P. 335)

Update Firmware(P. 336)

Initialize Eco Report Counter(P. 336)

Initialize Menu(P. 337)

Initialize All Data/Settings(P. 337)

Network Settings *1

See Network Settings (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 287) .

System Manager Information Settings

Specify the PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System

Management Settings>. You can set the PIN from <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an

Administrator. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

Setting Menu List

330

System Manager PIN

Enter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager PIN.

System Manager Name

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.

Device Information Settings

Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.

Device Name

Location

<System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select

<Device Name> or <Location> Enter <Device Name> or <Location> ( Entering

Text(P. 35) ) <Apply>

Security Settings *1

Enable or disable settings for IP address or MAC address packet ltering.

Use TLS

Select whether to use TLS encrypted communication. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the

Remote UI(P. 249)

Off

On

IPv4 Address Filter

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 234)

Off

On

Setting Menu List

331

<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

IPv6 Address Filter

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 234)

Off

On

<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

MAC Address Filter

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied MAC addresses.

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 238)

Off

On

<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

Select Country/Region *2

Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting

selected at initial power-on.

Austria (AT)

Belarus (BY)

Belgium (BE)

Czech Republic (CZ)

Denmark (DK)

Egypt (EG)

Finland (FI)

France (FR)

Germany (DE)

Greece (GR)

Hungary (HU)

Ireland (IE)

Netherlands (NL)

Norway (NO)

Poland (PL)

Portugal (PT)

Russia (RU)

Saudi Arabia (SA)

Slovenia (SI)

South Africa (ZA)

Spain (ES)

Sweden (SE)

Switzerland (CH)

Ukraine (UA)

Setting Menu List

332

Italy (IT)

Jordan (JO)

Luxembourg (LU)

Great Britain (GB)

Other

<System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a

country or region

Remote UI Settings *1

Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web

browser.

Use Remote UI

Select whether to use the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a

Web browser. Disabling Remote UI(P. 247)

Off

On

Remote UI Access Security Settings

Set whether a PIN is required for accessing the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a common

PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 231)

Off

On

Remote UI Access PIN

<System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI

Access Security Settings> <On> Enter PIN <Apply> PIN

(Conrm) <Apply>

Auto Online for Remote Scan

Select whether to use this feature to go online for remote scanning, even without using the operation panel.

Off

On

Setting Menu List

333

<System Management Settings> <Auto Online for Remote

Scan> Select <Off> or <On>

Use as USB Device

Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer.

Off

On

<System Management Settings> <Use as USB Device> Select <Off> or

<On> Restart the machine

Enable Product Extended Survey Program

Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).

Off

On

<System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey

Program> Select <Off> or <On>

Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status) *4

Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner cartridges. Also set

whether to use Toner Status.

Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)*1

Off

On

Toner Status Settings

Off

On

Displ. Purchase Button

Off

Setting Menu List

334

On

<System Management Settings> <Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner

Status)> Select <Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>*1 or <Toner Status

Settings> Select <Off> or <On>

If you selected <On> for <Toner Status Settings>, continue by selecting <On> or <Off> for <Displ. Purchase

Button>.

Google Cloud Print Settings *1

Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 159)

Enable Google Cloud Print

Off

On

Google Cloud Print Registration Status

PDL Selection (Plug and Play)

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language

when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play. For more information, see «MF Driver Installation Guide.»

Network*1

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is detected over the network.

UFRII LT

UFRII LT (V4)

PCL6*3

USB

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is connected to a computer via USB.

UFRII LT

UFRII LT (V4)

PCL6*3

Any setting change is enabled the next time the main power is turned ON.

Setting Menu List

335

<System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and

Play)> Select <Network> or <USB> Select a page description

language Restart the machine

<UFRII LT>

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer.

<UFRII LT (V4)>

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).

<PCL6>*3

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

Update Firmware

Select how to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.

<Via PC>

Select to manually install the rmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself. For instructions on

how to install the update, see the instruction manual available on the Web site. When the machine uses a

wireless LAN, update with <Via Internet> below or use a USB cable to connect.

<Via Internet>*1

Select to automatically install the rmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen

instructions to perform the update. The machine must be connected to the Internet.

<Version Information>

Select to check details for the current rmware.

Via PC

Via Internet*1

Version Information

Initialize Eco Report Counter *1

Select to restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Eco Report Counter (MF244dw /

MF232w)(P. 399)

Setting Menu List

336

Initialize Menu

Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,

or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 397)

Preferences

Timer Settings

Common Settings*3

Copy Settings

Scan Settings

Printer Settings

Adjustment/Maintenance

System Management Settings

Initialize All

System Management Settings

Select to restore the System Management Settings to the factory defaults. You can restore all the System

Management Settings at once. Initializing Menu(P. 397)

Network Settings*1

System Manager Information Settings

Device Information Settings

Security/Remote UI Settings*1

Auto Online for Remote Scan

Use as USB Device

Enable Product Extended Survey Program

Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)*4

Google Cloud Print Settings*1

PDL Selection (Plug and Play)

Initialize All

Initialize All Data/Settings

Delete all data on the machine and return it to its factory default settings.

<System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/

Settings> <Yes> <Yes> Restart the machine

Setting Menu List

337

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 339

Clearing Jams ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 341

When an Error Message Appears ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 347

Common Problems ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 355

Installation/Settings Problems ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 356

Copy/Printing Problems ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 360

When You Cannot Print Properly ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 363

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 365

Paper Creases or Curls ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 370

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 372

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 374

Troubleshooting

338

Troubleshooting

15A8-05Y

When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.

Paper Jams

If a document or paper jams, see Clearing Jams(P. 341) to remove the jammed paper.

A Message Appears

If the screen displays a message, see the following section.

When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

Common Problems

If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning, see the following sections before contacting Canon.

Common Problems(P. 355)

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

Copy/Printing Problems(P. 360)

Printing Results are Not Satisfactory

If printing results are not satisfactory, see When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 363) .

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved

If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 374) to nd out where to contact.

Troubleshooting

339

Troubleshooting

340

Clearing Jams

15A8-060

If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Press to display simple solutions. If it is dicult to

understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.

MF244dw

<Open feeder cover.>

Document Jams in the Feeder (MF244dw)(P. 342)

<Close upper area.> <Lift control panel.>

Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 342)

MF232w / MF231

<Close upper area.> <Lift control panel.>

Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 342)

When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine

Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed.

If paper tears

Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.

If paper jams repeatedly

Make sure that the paper and the packing material are completely removed.

Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.

Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.

Paper(P. 419)

Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.

Do not forcibly remove the jammed document or paper from the machine

Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local

authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Troubleshooting

341

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 374)

Document Jams in the Feeder (MF244dw)

If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them rst. Then, follow the procedure below.

1Open the feeder cover.

2Gently pull out the document.

3Close the feeder cover.

Paper Jams inside the Machine

1Remove the toner cartridge.

1Lift the operation panel.

Troubleshooting

342

The operation panel cannot be opened if the feeder or the platen glass cover is not completely closed.

Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.

3Remove the toner cartridge.

2Gently pull out the document.

Troubleshooting

343

3Check whether paper is jammed inside the paper exit guide.

1Pull out toward you while pressing the button ( ) to open the paper exit guide.

2Gently pull out the document.

3Close the paper exit guide.

4Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine.

1Gently pull out any paper between the xing assembly ( ) and roller ( ) until you can see the edge of

the paper.

2Once the edge of the paper is visible, pull it out slowly.

Troubleshooting

344

5Check whether paper is jammed in the manual feed slot or paper drawer.

1Slowly pull out any paper in the manual feed slot.

2Open the paper cover and remove any loaded paper.

3Gently pull out the document.

4Load paper and close the paper cover.

For MF232w / MF231, proceed to step 7.

6Check whether paper is jammed inside the rear cover.

Troubleshooting

345

1Open the rear cover.

2Gently pull out the document.

3Close the rear cover.

7Install the toner cartridge.

Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.

8Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.

If you cannot close the toner cover

Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.

Troubleshooting

346

When an Error Message Appears

15A8-061

If you cannot connect network or the memory is full, or you encounter operation problems, a message appears on the

display. Find out more information about messages in the following list.

A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use.

You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.

We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.

Consumables(P. 424)

Amount in cart. cannot be displ. correctly.

Toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.

Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner

cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the shop where you purchased the machine, or the Canon

Customer Care Center.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.

We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.

Consumables(P. 424)

Cannot nd the access point.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a

specic period of time.

Connect again paying attention to the time limit.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 172)

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 174)

An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect.

Check the SSID and enter the correct one again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.

Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.

Troubleshooting

347

Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use.

Toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.

Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner

cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the shop where you purchased the machine, or the Canon

Customer Care Center.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.

We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.

Consumables(P. 424)

Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.

The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

Check the authentication settings.

The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the

RADIUS server.

Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the

correct authentication method.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.

The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly

installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

Could not connect using Access Point Mode.

Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.

Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briey.

Troubleshooting

348

Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Could not connect using the wireless LAN.

A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.

Restart the machine and set again.

If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed

and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the

wireless router.

Could not connect using WPS.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.

Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.

If WPS is supported:

Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

If WPS is not supported:

Set using another connecting method.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.

It was not possible to detect any mobile device within the predetermined length of time.

Connect again paying attention to the time limit.

Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Could not perform cleaning.

Paper jammed during cleaning.

Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.

Clearing Jams(P. 341)

Fixing Assembly(P. 383)

Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.

The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Troubleshooting

349

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to

<Open System>.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to

«Open System.»

Change the WEP authentication method to «Shared Key» at the wireless router, and connect again. For

more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer.

Could not update the device time because its battery has run out. Cannot

use Google Cloud Print if the time settings are incorrect.

The machine’s battery has run out and the correct time settings could not be kept.

Set the correct time again.

Current Date/Time Settings(P. 304)

Direct Connection terminated.

Connection between the machine and the mobile device was terminated.

Reestablish Direct Connection.

Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

Google Cloud Print not avail. Server auth err

Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.

Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specied.

Date/Time Settings(P. 303)

Google Cloud Print not avail. Server comm err

Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.

Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169)

A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the

5222 port is available with your computer.

If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server

are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.

Troubleshooting

350

Setting a Proxy (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 243)

Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.

The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.

Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine

again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

Insert the toner cartridge.

The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.

Properly set the toner cartridge.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

Maximum number of wireless devices connected w/ Direct Connection has

been reached. To connect other devices, terminate some of current

connections.

The number of directly connected mobile devices is at a maximum.

To connect other devices by Direct Connection, disconnect current device(s) and try connecting again.

Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 144)

No Paper: XXXX*

*<Drawer 1> or <MP Tray> is displayed for XXXX.

Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot.

Load the paper.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.

Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Troubleshooting

351

No reply from the destination.

A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.

Check the status of the network cables and switches.

No response from host.

The machine is not connected to a network correctly.

Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.

Connecting to a Network(P. 166)

Paper jammed.

Paper jams.

Remove the jammed paper or document, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).

Clearing Jams(P. 341)

Preparing a cartridge is recommended.

The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.

Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. It is recommended to

replace the toner cartridge when printing a large volume of documents.

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 388)

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Set the correct authentication information.

The client authentication information (key pair and certicate, user name and password, or CA

certicate) is not set correctly.

Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key pair and certicate, user

name and password, and CA certicate).

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 269)

Size/Settings Mismatch

The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.

Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.

Troubleshooting

352

To use the loaded paper

Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded

paper size.

To load paper without changing the settings

Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

The connection with the PC has been lost. Check the connection.

The connection to the computer was lost during a scan.

Check the connection between the machine and the computer.

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 129)

The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?

A document could not be scanned due to insucient memory space.

Select whether to print up to the scanned pages or to cancel the scanning. If you cancel, divide the

document into multiple sections and scan them, or change the scanning settings.

The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.

The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to

«Open System.»

Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to

<Open System>.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

Change the WEP authentication method to «Shared Key» at the wireless router, and connect again. For

more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer.

Use Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.

The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.

Troubleshooting

353

Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.

Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.

If using TLS, check whether a key pair is registered.

If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 252)

Troubleshooting

354

Common Problems

15A8-062

If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the

problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Check the Following

Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?

If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected

correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.

Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

Are the LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?

Check whether these cables are connected correctly.

Parts and Their Functions(P. 15)

Is sleep mode activated?

If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for power

conservation, not allowing you to operate it.

To cancel sleep mode, press .

Is any message displayed on the screen?

If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.

When an Error Message Appears(P. 347)

If a Problem Persists Even after Checking

Click the link that corresponds to the problem.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 356)

Copy/Printing Problems(P. 360)

Troubleshooting

355

Installation/Settings Problems

15A8-063

See Common Problems(P. 355) also.

Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 356)

Problem with the USB Connection(P. 359)

Problem with the Print Server (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 359)

Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection (MF244dw / MF232w)

The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.

The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the

same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.

Remote UI is not displayed.

Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 246)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 247)

If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi indicator is lit and the IP address is set

correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.

Operation Panel(P. 23)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set

correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 169)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine’s IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do

not use the proxy server) in the Web browser’s proxy settings dialog.

Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is

incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to

set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 233)

IPv4 Address Filter (P. 331)

IPv6 Address Filter (P. 332)

MAC Address Filter (P. 332)

A connection to a network cannot be established.

The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 187)

When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly

installed and ready to connect to the network.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 357)

Troubleshooting

356

You are unsure of the set IP address. Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a

wireless LAN.

Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is

required to have the machine switch to your selection.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 168)

You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be

connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.

Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.

Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access

point list.

Check whether the SSID is correct.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 184)

If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless

router.

* A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.

Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 357)

The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup

router is connected to a network).

If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast

packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are

correct.

If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even

if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.

If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the

devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings

are correct.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN

Check the status of your computer.

Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?

Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)

correctly plugged in?

Is the wireless router turned on?

Troubleshooting

357

If the problem persists even after checking the above:

Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.

Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.

Check whether the machine is turned ON.

If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.

Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.

Is the machine too far from the wireless router?

Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?

Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that

emit radio waves near the machine?

Perform one of the following settings again.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 172)

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 174)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 177)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180)

When you need to manually set up the connection

If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN

connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 180) ).

ANY connection refusal* is activated.

The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.

The stealth mode is activated.

* A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to «ANY»

or is blank.

When you need to change the settings of the wireless router

If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.

The MAC address packet ltering is set.

Troubleshooting

358

When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2

encryption method is set to TKIP.

Problem with the USB Connection

Cannot communicate.

Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.

If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.

Problem with the Print Server (MF244dw / MF232w)

You cannot nd the print server to connect to.

Are the print server and computer connected correctly?

Is the print server running?

Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.

Is [Network discovery] enabled? (Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012)

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 434)

You cannot connect to a shared printer.

On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,

contact the network or server administrator.

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 435)

Troubleshooting

359

Copy/Printing Problems

15A8-064

See Common Problems(P. 355) also.

Printing/copy results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You

Cannot Print Properly(P. 363)

You cannot print.

Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the

machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 436)

If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment.

Wireless LAN connection (MF244dw / MF232w)

Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

If the connection is poor, try the following.

Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to be

at least ve channels apart.

If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same

wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 194)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 441)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170)

When you reset wireless LAN connection settings

As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.

Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 439)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 201)

Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,

you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4

Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 233)

IPv4 Address Filter (P. 331)

IPv6 Address Filter (P. 332)

Disable security software and other resident software.

Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.

Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Wired LAN connection (MF244dw / MF232w)

Troubleshooting

360

Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 439)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 201)

Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is

incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation

panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 233)

IPv4 Address Filter (P. 331)

IPv6 Address Filter (P. 332)

MAC Address Filter (P. 332)

Disable security software and other resident software.

Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.

Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

USB connection

Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer driver

in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port

is created automatically.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 439)

Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 440)

Disable security software and other resident software.

Connect to another USB port on the computer.

Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Via print server (MF244dw / MF232w)

Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between

the print server and your computer.

Problem with the Print Server (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 359)

Disable security software and other resident software.

Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.

Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Printing seems to be slow. *

Print or delete data in memory.

* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer

does. There is nothing abnormal.

Troubleshooting

361

You cannot print with Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 159)

It takes a long time before printing starts.

Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to

maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the

machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.

A blank sheet is output (nothing is printed).

Did you pull the sealing tape out when loading the toner cartridge? If you did not pull it out, remove the

toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape out, and reload the toner cartridge.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

Troubleshooting

362

When You Cannot Print Properly

15A8-065

If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Smudge Marks Appear on the

Edge of Printouts(P. 365)

Streaks Appear on

Printouts(P. 365)

White Streaks Appear(P. 366)

Toner Smudges and Splatters

Appear(P. 366)

Printouts Are Faded(P. 367) Printed Pages Have White

Specks(P. 367)

A Portion of the Page Is Not

Printed(P. 368)

Print Density Is Uneven(P. 368) Printouts Are Grayish(P. 369)

Troubleshooting

363

Cannot Scan a Printed

Barcode(P. 369)

Paper Creases(P. 370) Paper Curls(P. 370)

Printouts Are Skewed(P. 372) Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More

Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 372)

Paper Jams Frequently with 2-

Sided Printing (MF244dw)(P. 373)

Troubleshooting

364

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory

15A8-066

Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst.

Cleaning the Machine(P. 377)

Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts

Do you print data without margins?

This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the

edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make

sure to have margins around the document to print.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Streaks Appear on Printouts

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Paper(P. 419)

Loading Paper(P. 42)

If using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem, change one of the <Special Printing Mode

Z>, <Special Printing Mode C>, and <Special Printing Mode D> settings.

Special Processing (P. 325)

To print from a computer, change the setting for [Special Print Adjustment] in the printer driver.

[Mode 1] has the least effect while [Mode 4] has the most effect. Try each in order starting with [Mode 1].

Increasing the effect makes the print density lighter. Outlines may also be blurred or images may appear

somewhat grainy.

Troubleshooting

365

Did you just replace the toner cartridge? Have you not used the printer for a

long period of time?

Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode B>.

Special Processing (P. 325)

White Streaks Appear

Is the platen glass dirty?

Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.

Platen Glass(P. 379)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?

Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Paper(P. 419)

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode U>.

Special Processing (P. 325)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?

Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Troubleshooting

366

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Printouts Are Faded

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?

Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings

properly.

Paper(P. 419)

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Are you using the machine in a special environment (in particular, a low-

temperature environment)?

Toner may not adhere adequately, causing printouts to appear faded. Change the setting for <Special

Printing Mode K>.

Special Processing (P. 325)

Printed Pages Have White Specks

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Paper(P. 419)

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Troubleshooting

367

Is the drum in the toner cartridge deteriorated?

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Are you printing a document with strong contrasts?

Change the setting for [Special Print Mode] using the Printer Driver.

When set to [Special Settings 2], print density is lighter compared with [Off] or [Special Settings 1]. Text and

lines may also appear faded.

A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed

Do you print data without margins?

This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the

edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make

sure to have margins around the document to print.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Print Density Is Uneven

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?

Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Is printing sometimes uneven when printing ne lines?

Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode J>.

Troubleshooting

368

Special Processing (P. 325)

Printouts Are Grayish

Is <Correct Density> in <Copy Settings> set too dark?

Adjust the setting so that density is lighter.

Correct Density(P. 311)

Is the printer installed where it is subject to direct sunlight or strong light?

Install the printer in an appropriate location.

Installation(P. 3)

Relocating the Machine(P. 393)

Was the toner cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time?

Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This

may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Cannot Scan a Printed Barcode

Are you trying to scan a barcode printed with factory default settings?

In the printer driver, specify [Special Settings 1] for the setting of [Special Print Mode].

When set to [Special Settings 1], print density is lighter compared with [Off]. Text and lines may also

appear faded.

White specks may appear in images when this feature is used with paper other than lightweight paper.

Troubleshooting

369

Paper Creases or Curls

15A8-067

Paper Creases

Is paper loaded correctly?

If paper is not loaded below the load limit guide or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?

Replace with appropriate paper.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Paper(P. 419)

If the problem persists after using appropriate paper, change the setting for <Special Printing Mode V>.

Special Processing (P. 325)

Paper Curls

Are you using appropriate paper?

Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings

properly.

Paper(P. 419)

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Troubleshooting

370

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

If using plain paper (60 to 89 g/m²), making the following change in the printer driver may solve the

problem.

[Page Setup] tab [Paper Type] [Plain L [60-89 g/m2]].

If the use of the appropriate paper does not solve the poblem, change the setting for <Special Printing

Mode V>.

Special Processing(P. 325)

Troubleshooting

371

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly

15A8-068

Printouts Are Skewed

Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?

If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Is the paper source the manual feed slot?

Load the paper into the paper drawer.

Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 44)

Are you printing on curled envelopes?

Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.

Loading Envelopes(P. 49)

Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together

Is paper loaded correctly?

Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.

Check whether paper is loaded correctly.

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is

used.

Paper(P. 419)

Troubleshooting

372

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.

Paper Jams Frequently with 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw)

Does paper jam frequently especially with lightweight paper or curled paper

during 2-sided printing?

Set <Special Printing Mode I> to <On>.

Special Processing (P. 325)

Troubleshooting

373

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved

15A8-069

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon

dealer or the Canon help line.

Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself

If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.

When Contacting Canon

When contacting us, have the following information ready:

Product name (MF244dw / MF232w / MF231)

Dealer where you purchased the machine

Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)

Serial number (eight alphanumeric characters long, found on the label on the back side of the machine)

MF244dw MF232w / MF231

Troubleshooting

374

Maintenance

Maintenance ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 376

Cleaning the Machine ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 377

Exterior ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 378

Platen Glass ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 379

Feeder (MF244dw) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 382

Fixing Assembly ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 383

Machine Interior …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 384

Replacing Toner Cartridges ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 386

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 388

How to Replace Toner Cartridges ………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 390

Relocating the Machine …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 393

Viewing the Counter Value ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 395

Initializing Settings …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 396

Initializing Menu …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 397

Initialize Eco Report Counter (MF244dw / MF232w) ………………………………………………………………………….. 399

Initializing All Data/Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 400

Maintenance

375

Maintenance

15A8-06A

This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.

Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine(P. 377)

The machine becomes dirty Exterior(P. 378)

Smudge marks appear on originals or printouts Platen Glass(P. 379) Feeder

(MF244dw)(P. 382)

Streaks appear on printouts Fixing Assembly(P. 383)

The interior of the machine becomes dirty Machine Interior(P. 384)

Replacing Toner Cartridges

If you want to check the remaining toner cartridge level Replacing Toner

Cartridges(P. 386)

How to replace toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

Relocating the Machine

Relocating the machine for maintenance or an oce move Relocating the

Machine(P. 393)

Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine

If you want to check the total page number of printouts Viewing the Counter Value(P. 395)

Initializing Settings

If you want to restore the settings Initializing Settings(P. 396)

Maintenance

376

Cleaning the Machine

15A8-06C

Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.

Carefully read the safety instructions before you start cleaning. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 8)

Where to Clean

Exterior of the machine

Exterior(P. 378)

Rollers inside the feeder (MF244dw)

Feeder (MF244dw)(P. 382)

Interior of the machine and xing assembly

Fixing Assembly(P. 383)

Machine Interior(P. 384)

Platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen

grass cover

Platen Glass(P. 379)

Maintenance

377

Exterior

15A8-06E

Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good

condition.

Ventilation slots are provided only on MF244dw.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

2Clean the exterior of the machine.

Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.

To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 16) .

3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.

4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

378

Platen Glass

15A8-06F

Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover to prevent

smudges to be printed on documents or printouts.

Feeder scan area cleaning notication (MF244dw)

To display a message for soiling on the platen glass, set <Notify to Clean> to

<On>.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

2Open the feeder or the platen glass cover.

3Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder or the platen glass cover.

Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

For MF244dw, in addition to the platen glass and underside of the feeder, make sure to clean and wipe the

white strip of plate ( ) and the surface of the transparent plastic part ( ), too.

Maintenance

379

When wiping the transparent plastic part ( ), take care not to bend the plastic.

If the problem persists (MF244dw)

Remove the transparent plastic part ( ) and wipe it.

1Hold the tabs ( ) at both ends of the transparent plastic part, and remove the plastic part by gently

lifting the rearward end rst.

The plastic part ( ) is rather damageable. When removing it, be careful not to bend it.

2Wipe the scanning area ( ).

3Wipe the back side of the transparent plastic part.

Maintenance

380

4Wait for the plastic part to dry completely.

5Place the transparent plastic part back into position.

Make sure of the proper orientation, then hold the tabs and place the plastic part back into position

by gently lowering the frontward end rst.

4Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.

5Gently close the feeder or the platen glass cover.

6Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

381

Feeder

15A8-06H

Dust and graphite powder may adhere to the roller inside the feeder and cause smudges to appear on printouts. To

clean the feeder, perform the following procedure.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

2Open the feeder cover.

3Wipe roller ( ) inside feeder.

Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

4Gently close the feeder cover.

5Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

382

Fixing Assembly

15A8-06J

Dirt may adhere to the xing units inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean the

xing unit, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing unit when the machine has

documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing unit, you need paper larger than plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set

the paper in the manual feed slot before performing the following procedure.

Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient toner cartridge remaining

beforehand.

It takes approximately 90 seconds to clean the xing assembly.

Checking Toner cartridge Level(P. 387)

Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 47)

1Press .

2Use / to select <Adjustment/Maintenance>, and press .

3Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>, and press .

4Load paper (A4/LTR or larger) in the manual feed slot, and press .

After cleaning is completed and the message <Finished.> appears, press to return to the copy mode

screen.

Maintenance

383

Machine Interior

15A8-06K

Clean the interior of the machine regularly so that toner/paper dust does not collect.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

2Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

Make sure the feeder or platen glass cover is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on

the platen glass, remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

3Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.

4Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.

Maintenance

384

5Using a lint-free clean, soft, dry cloth, wipe away toner/paper dust from the inside.

6Install the toner cartridge.

Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.

7Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.

If you cannot close the toner cover

Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.

8Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

385

Replacing Toner Cartridges

15A8-06L

The machine will display a message when a toner cartridge is nearly empty. Note that the print quality becomes poor if

you continue printing without taking any action. You can check the remaining toner cartridge level on the display.

When a Message Appear(P. 386)

If Printouts Are Poor in Quality(P. 386)

Checking Toner cartridge Level(P. 387)

When a Message Appear

Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge

ready or replace the toner cartridge. Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 388) How to Replace Toner

Cartridges(P. 390) Consumables(P. 424)

<Preparing a cartridge is recommended.>

This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Shake the toner cartridge to evenly

distribute the toner inside the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to

print a large job.

Specify when this message is displayed

You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers this

message. Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.(P. 324)

<Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.>

This message noties you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you

replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.

If Printouts Are Poor in Quality

If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is nearly empty. Replace the

nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 388)

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

White streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density

Maintenance

386

Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in

printouts

Checking Toner cartridge Level

You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge according to the following, whenever you want to. It is

recommended that you check the level before you start to print a large job.

<Device Information> <Cartridge Level> Check the amount remaining

in the toner cartridge

Cartridge Level

Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their

lifetime before the toner runs out.

The displayed amount remaining in the toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ

from the actual amount.

LINKS

Consumables(P. 9)

Maintenance

387

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge

15A8-06R

Perform the following before replacing the toner cartridge. The message may no longer appear, or print quality may

be improved. Review cautions for handling the toner cartridge before starting. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 8)

Consumables(P. 9)

1Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

Make sure the feeder or platen glass cover is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on

the platen glass, remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.

3Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.

Maintenance

388

4Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner

inside the cartridge.

5Install the toner cartridge.

Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.

6Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.

If you cannot close the toner cover

Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly.

Forcing it closed may cause damage.

LINKS

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Maintenance

389

How to Replace Toner Cartridges

15A8-06S

Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 8) and Consumables(P. 9) before replacing the toner

cartridges.

1Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

Make sure the feeder or platen glass cover is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on

the platen glass, remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.

3Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.

Maintenance

390

4Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective bag.

5Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner

inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.

6Pull the sealing tape straight out.

The full length of the sealing tape is approximately 50 cm.

Maintenance

391

When pulling out the sealing tape

If the sealing tape remains inside the toner cartridge, the quality of printouts may deteriorate.

Do not pull out the sealing tape at an angle or sideways. If the tape breaks, you may not be able to pull it

out completely.

If the sealing tape becomes stuck when pulling it out, keep pulling until it is completely removed.

7Install the toner cartridge.

Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.

8Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.

If you cannot close the toner cover

Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.

LINKS

Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 388)

Maintenance

392

Relocating the Machine

15A8-06U

The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also

make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)

1Turn OFF the machine and computer.

When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.

2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the

illustration below.

Whether the cables with «*» are connected depends on your environment.

Power plug

Power cord

USB cable*

LAN cable*

3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.

How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

4Open the paper cover and remove any paper.

If the paper guides are extended, return them so that they t in the paper drawer.

5Close all the open covers, and move the machine to the new location.

Check how heavy the machine is and carry it without straining. Machine Specications(P. 414)

Lift by the carrying grips on the front of the machine.

Maintenance

393

6Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.

For installation steps after moving, see «Getting Started». Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 425)

Maintenance

394

Viewing the Counter Value

15A8-06W

You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. This total includes lists in addition to copies and

printouts of data from computers.

<Device Information> <Check Counter>

Maintenance

395

Initializing Settings

15A8-06X

You can restore the following settings:

Initializing Menu(P. 397)

Initialize Eco Report Counter (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 399)

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 400)

Maintenance

396

Initializing Menu

15A8-06Y

You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 285) ). Depending on the settings selected, you

may need to restart the machine after initialization.

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting

the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

<System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you

want to initialize <Yes>

Items for initializing

Select the setting you want to initialize.

When <System Management Settings> is selected

Select the specic system management settings that you want to initialize and select <Yes>, and press .

Settings to be initialized

Select the settings to be initialized.

Maintenance

397

<Initialize All>

Initializes all the system management settings.

If Remote UI settings are initialized

The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the Remote UI Access PIN.

Setting a Remote UI PIN (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 231)

You can use the procedure below to restore the default <Network Settings>.

<Network Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart

the machine

<Initialize All>

Initializes all the settings.

Maintenance

398

Initialize Eco Report Counter

15A8-070

You can initialize the number of printouts appearing in the Eco Report and return it to its factory default setting. The

number of printouts returns to 0 after being initialized.

If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and press

. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 229)

<System Management Settings> <Initialize Eco Report

Counter> <Yes>

LINKS

Eco Report(P. 298)

Maintenance

399

Initializing All Data/Settings

15A8-071

To make changes to registered data and settings all at once such as when changing the installation location of the

machine, you can delete registered data and initialize all settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 285) ) together at the same

time. You are required to restart the machine after initializing all data/settings.

If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and press . Setting the

System Manager PIN(P. 229)

<System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings>

<Yes> <Yes> Restart the machine.

Maintenance

400

Appendix

Appendix …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 402

Third Party Software (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 403

Feature Highlights ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 404

Going Green and Saving Money ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 405

Improving Eciency ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 407

Going Digital ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 409

So Much More ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 411

Specications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 413

Machine Specications ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 414

Wireless LAN Specications (MF244dw / MF232w) ……………………………………………………………………………. 416

Document Type ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 417

Scan Area …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 418

Paper ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 419

Copy Specications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 421

Scanner Specications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 422

Printer Specications …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 423

Consumables ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 424

Manuals Included with the Machine …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 425

Using User’s Guide ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 426

Screen Layout of User’s Guide ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 427

Viewing User’s Guide …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 431

Manual Display Settings ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 432

Others ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 433

Basic Windows Operations …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 434

Notice ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 443

Appendix

401

Appendix

15A8-072

This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User’s Guide, disclaimers,

copyright information, and other important information for customers.

Appendix

402

Third Party Software

15A8-085

For information related to third-party software, click the following icon.

Appendix

403

Feature Highlights

15A8-073

Give the features that are described in this section. The features are grouped under four headings: «Going Green and

Saving Money», «Improving Eciency», «Going Digital», and «So Much More».

Appendix

404

Going Green and Saving Money

15A8-074

2-Sided Printing (MF244dw)

You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from your computer. Because you’ll only be using half

the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper costs in half. The key enables you to save

even more paper by allowing you to simultaneously select the settings for 2-sided copying and for copying

multiple pages onto one sheet.

To make 2-sided copies: 2-Sided Copying (MF244dw)(P. 75)

To save paper when you copy: Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF244dw)

(P. 99)

Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet

To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto a single sheet — 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16

pages for print jobs sent from your computer. This is even more effective when used together with 2-sided

printing.

To copy multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet

(2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 77)

To save paper when you copy: Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

To print multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 103)

Appendix

405

Sleep Mode

For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become

an essential feature. This machine will enter sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to sleep whenever

you want. Press once to put the machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into

action.

For more information about this function, see Entering Sleep Mode(P. 59) .

Save Toner

Got multi-page documents or drafts that don’t need presentation-quality printing?

There’s a setting that uses less toner. Give it a try and save toner and money.

For more information about this function, see Saving Toner(P. 116) .

Appendix

406

Improving Eciency

15A8-075

Shortcut Keys for Copying and Scanning

Take advantage of the shortcut keys on the operation panel so you don’t have to recongure the same settings

over and over again. Use the key to save paper by copying two or four pages onto one sheet. If you

are using a machine capable of 2-sided printing, you can also copy on both sides of the sheet. For scanning, use

the key to preset your favorite save destinations, scan types, and le formats. Just place your document

and press the shortcut key to scan.

To save paper when you copy: Using the [Paper Save Copy] Key (MF244dw / MF231)(P. 79)

To easily scan documents: Scanning Using the [Scan -> PC] Key(P. 133)

Remote Management with Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)

Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all without having to go over to the machine. Congure

settings and keep an eye on the machine’s status with an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface

that you’ll master immediately. Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine.

For more information about this function, see Using Remote UI (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 272) .

Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation

Appendix

407

You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided

printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to

conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.

For more information Printing a Document(P. 87)

Appendix

408

Going Digital

15A8-076

Scan Only What You Need

What if you’re scanning a whole page of a newspaper but all you’re really interested in is a headline and a

photo? Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a preview, and then have the scanner disregard

the rest. Otherwise you’ll have to use an editing program to crop out everything you don’t need.

Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images

as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result

in criminal and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print

or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or

otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.

For more information about this function, see Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 140) .

Searchable PDFs

Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a «searchable PDF*«. By scanning an original with both text and

images, text portions are converted by OCR into text data. In addition to being able to search for text

information, you can also copy required portions into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in Microsoft

Oce. Eliminate the need to type in customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.

* You cannot create a searchable PDF in the Mac OS environment.

For more information about scanning from a computer, see Scanning from a Computer(P. 137) .

Appendix

409

Add Images to a Work in Progress

Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents

you’re working on. This way you can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the

scanned images and then exporting them to the application you’re really using.

For more information about this function, see Scanning Using an Application(P. 138) .

Appendix

410

So Much More

15A8-077

Using a smartphone/tablet (MF244dw / MF232w)

At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a

business destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon PRINT Business

or Canon Print Service comes in handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to

the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and directly.

PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age

of speed.

For more information Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 142)

Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print (MF244dw / MF232w)

Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed

documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from

wherever you want.

For more information about this function, see Using Google Cloud Print(P. 159) .

Go Wireless (MF244dw / MF232w)

No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you’ve got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings

process altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use

Appendix

411

document system that you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free

wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.

For more information about this function, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 170) .

Make Posters

Blow up a regular one-sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster. A large poster will be printed out

on nine sheets. Put them together in a 3×3 grid, and voila!

For more information about this function, see Printing Posters(P. 105) .

Make Booklets (MF244dw)

Sometimes your documents deserve better presentation than a staple in the upper-left corner. Making booklets

is easy. The print driver will take care of the page positioning for you. All you have to do is fold the pages and

staple them along the middle.

For more information about this function, see Printing Booklet (MF244dw)(P. 107) .

Appendix

412

Specications

15A8-078

The machine specications are subject to change without prior notice due to improvements of the machine.

Machine Specications(P. 414)

Wireless LAN Specications (MF244dw / MF232w)(P. 416)

Document Type(P. 417)

Scan Area(P. 418)

Paper(P. 419)

Copy Specications(P. 421)

Scanner Specications(P. 422)

Printer Specications(P. 423)

Appendix

413

Machine Specications

15A8-079

Type Personal Desktop

Power Supply*1 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

(Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased

the product.)

Power Consumption Maximum

— MF244dw

1,150 W or less

— MF232w / MF231

1,120 W or less

Average consumption during standby mode

— MF244dw

Approx. 4.1 W

— MF232w / MF231

Approx. 4.2 W

Average consumption during sleep mode

MF244dw

Approx. 1.3 W (by USB Connections)

Approx. 1.4 W (by Wired Connections)

Approx. 2.1 W (by Wireless Connections)

MF232w

Approx. 1.2 W (by USB Connections)

Approx. 1.3 W (by Wired Connections)

Approx. 2.0 W (by Wireless Connections)

MF231

Approx. 1.2 W

When the power switch is turned OFF

0.5 W or less

Warm-up Time*2

(From power ON until machine enters standby)

MF244dw / MF232w

13.5 seconds or less

MF231

12.0 seconds or less

Weight*3 — MF244dw

Approx. 12.7 kg

— MF232w

Approx. 10.8 kg

MF231

Approx. 10.7 kg

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

MF244dw

390 x 371 x 360 mm

MF232w / MF231

390 x 371 x 312 mm

*1 The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.

*2 Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.

*3 The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.

*4 MF244dw / MF232w only

*5 Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level.

Appendix

414

Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10 to 30°C

Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)

Host Interface 100BASE-TX*4

10BASE-T*4

Hi-Speed USB

IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)*4

Noise

(measured in accordance with ISO 7779, declared noise

emission in accordance with ISO 9296)

LwAd (Declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))

MF244dw

During standby mode: Inaudible*5

During printing: 6.6 B or less (1-sided)

During printing: 6.6 B or less (2-sided)

MF232w / MF231

During standby mode: Inaudible*5

During printing: 6.6 B or less (1-sided)

LpAm (Declared A-weighted emission sound pressure level (Bystander

position))

MF244dw

During standby mode: Inaudible*5

During printing: Approx. 52 dB (1-sided)

During printing: Approx. 52 dB (2-sided)

MF232w / MF231

During standby mode: Inaudible*5

During printing: Approx. 51 dB (1-sided)

Acceptable Documents Supported Document Types(P. 417)

Acceptable Paper Stock Paper(P. 419)

Printable Range Printable Area(P. 420)

Scan Range Scan Area(P. 418)

*1 The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.

*2 Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.

*3 The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.

*4 MF244dw / MF232w only

*5 Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level.

Appendix

415

Wireless LAN Specications

15A8-07A

Standard IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11n

Frequency Range 2,412 to 2,472 MHz

Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode / Access Point Mode

Security Infrastructure Mode

WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Appendix

416

Document Type

15A8-07C

Supported Document Types

Platen Glass Feeder (MF244dw)

Size

(W x L)

Up to 216 x 297 mm Maximum size: 216 x 356 mm

Minimum size: 148 x 105 mm

Weight 50 to 105 g/m²

Paper Capacity 1 sheet Up to 35 sheets (A4, 80 g/m²)

Appendix

417

Scan Area

15A8-07E

The shaded areas in the table below indicate the scan area of the document. Make sure that text and images in your

documents t within the shaded area. The scan area varies depending on the function used and where documents are

placed.

Platen Glass Feeder (MF244dw)

Copy

The scan area for copying may differ from the

printable area. Printable Area(P. 420)

The scan area for copying may differ from the

printable area. Printable Area(P. 420)

Scan

Appendix

418

Paper

15A8-07F

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer, and the manual feed slot are listed below.

A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

Legal (216 x 356 mm)*1

Letter (216 x 279 mm)*1

Statement (140 x 216 mm)

Executive (184 x 267 mm)

Ocio (216 x 318 mm)*1

Ocio (Brazil) (216 x 355 mm)*1

Ocio (Mexico) (216 x 341 mm)*1

Letter (Government) (203 x 267 mm)

Legal (Government) (203 x 330 mm)

Foolscap (216 x 330 mm)*1

Foolscap (Australia) (206 x 338 mm)

Legal (India) (215 x 345 mm)*1

F4A (216 x 343 mm)*1

Envelope No. 10 (COM10) (104.7 x 241.3 mm)

Envelope Monarch (98.4 x 190.5 mm)*2

Envelope C5 (162 x 229 mm)

Envelope DL (110 x 220 mm)

3x5inch (76 x 127 mm)*2

Custom*3

*1 Only in MF244dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*2 You can load Envelope Monarch and 3x5inch only in the manual feed slot.

*3 Custom paper size of 76.2 to 216.0 mm in width and 210 to 356 mm in length can be loaded in the paper drawer. Custom

paper size of 76.2 to 216.0 mm in width and 127 to 356.0 mm in length can be loaded in the manual feed slot.

Appendix

419

The default paper size of the machine is set to A4. Change the paper size setting when using a different

size of paper.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 53)

Paper Type and Paper Source Capacity

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.

Paper Type Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer Paper Capacity for Manual Feed Slot

Plain paper*1

60 to 80 g/m² 250 sheets 1 sheet

81 to 89 g/m² 170 sheets 1 sheet

Heavy paper*2

90 to 105 g/m² 170 sheets 1 sheet

106 to 163 g/m² 100 sheets 1 sheet

Recycled paper*1

60 to 80 g/m² 250 sheets 1 sheet

81 to 89 g/m² 170 sheets 1 sheet

Color paper*1

60 to 80 g/m² 250 sheets 1 sheet

81 to 89 g/m² 170 sheets 1 sheet

Bond paper*3 60 to 163 g/m² 100 sheets 1 sheet

Label 100 sheets 1 sheet

Envelope 20 sheets 1 sheet

*1 Only in MF244dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*2 Only in MF244dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available for heavy paper 1 (90 to 120 g/m²).

*3 Only in MF244dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available for bond paper 1 (60 to 90 g/m²) and bond paper 2 (91 to 120 g/m²).

Paper Type and Setting for the Machine

Loading Paper(P. 42)

Printable Area

The shaded areas in the image below indicate the printable area of the document.

Appendix

420

Copy Specications

15A8-07H

Scan Resolution Text/Photo (High Speed)

300 x 600 dpi

Text/Photo, Photo, Text

600 x 600 dpi

Output Resolution 600 x 600 dpi

Copy Ratio 100% 1:1, 400% Max, 200%, 141% A5->A4, 70% A4->A5, 50%,

25% Min

Copy Speed*1

(A4 Plain 1:1)

MF244dw

27 cpm

MF232w / MF231

23 cpm

Continuous Copying Capacity Maximum 999 copies

First Copy Time

(A4)

Platen glass: 9 seconds or less

Feeder*2: 14 seconds or less

*1 The copy speed on A4 size plain paper on one-side printing is measured during continuous copying. Copy speeds vary depending on the

output resolution, the paper type and size, and the paper feeding direction. Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the machine

may experience downtime or decrease the copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust the temperature inside the machine or

maintain the optimal print quality.

*2 MF244dw only.

Appendix

421

Scanner Specications

15A8-07J

Type Color scanner

Maximum Scan Size Platen glass: up to 216 x 297 mm

Feeder*1: up to 216 x 356 mm

Scan Resolution Optical resolution

Platen glass: up to 600 x 600 dpi

Feeder*1: up to 300 x 300 dpi

Software interpolation resolution

9,600 x 9,600 dpi

Scan Speed*2

(A4, 300 x 300 dpi)

Color: Approx. 4 seconds/sheet

Black and White: Approx. 3 seconds/sheet

Driver TWAIN

WIA 2.0

ICA

*1 MF244dw only.

*2 Speed of scanning via the platen glass. The communication time is not included.

Appendix

422

Printer Specications

15A8-07K

Output Tray Capacity*1

(a fresh stack of A4 size paper)

Approx. 100 sheets (68 g/m²)

Print Speed*2

(A4 Plain 1:1)

MF244dw

27 ppm

MF232w / MF231

23 ppm

First Print Time*3

(A4)

6 seconds or less

Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi (1,200 dpi equivalent x 1,200 dpi equivalent)

Gradation 256 gradations

Toner Cartridges Consumables(P. 424)

*1 May vary depending on the installation environment and paper type used.

*2 The print speed on A4 size plain paper on one-side printing is measured during continuous printing. Print speeds vary depending on the

output resolution, the paper type and size, and the paper feeding direction. Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the machine

may experience downtime or decrease the print speed in the middle of a continuous print run to adjust the temperature inside the machine or

maintain the optimal print quality.

*3 May vary depending on the output environment.

Appendix

423

Consumables

15A8-07L

The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine. Purchase

consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling

consumables ( Consumables(P. 9) ).

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is

recommended.

Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace

consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.

Replacement toner cartridges are different from the supplied toner cartridges, so the yield may also differ.

Toner Cartridges

Supplied Toner Cartridges

The average yield* of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine is 900

sheets.

* The average yield is based on «ISO/IEC 19752» (the global standard related to «Method for

the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers

and multi-function devices that contain printer components» issued by ISO [International

Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default print

density setting.

Replacement Toner Cartridges

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge *

Canon Cartridge 737 2,400 sheets

When replacing toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 390)

LINKS

Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 386)

Appendix

424

Manuals Included with the Machine

15A8-07R

The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup procedures, from

removing the packing materials to setting up the machine.

Wireless LAN Setting

Guide (MF244dw / MF232w)

This manual describes the procedure for connecting the machine

to a wireless LAN router, it also contains information for

troubleshooting when conguring the settings. Read this manual

with Getting Started.

User’s Guide (This Manual)

This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual

that is viewed using a Web browser. You can browse information

by category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specic

topic. Using User‘s Guide(P. 426)

Appendix

425

Using User‘s Guide

15A8-07S

The User‘s Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer, smartphone, or other similar device.

How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for

You can nd the page you are looking for using the following 2 methods.

Search the contents

You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from [Contents] on the left side of the screen.

Top Page(P. 427)

Topic Page(P. 429)

Search by keyword

Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as «copy» or «wireless LAN», and the pages containing the

keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases

such as «connecting to a network.» The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple

keywords.

Search(P. 429)

System Requirements

If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as

PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.

Appendix

426

Screen Layout of User’s Guide

15A8-07X

The User‘s Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Top Page

Appears when the User’s Guide starts.

Contents

The titles of chapters are displayed.

/

Click to display all items, including those nested underneath other items. Click to return to the

original list.

/

Click to switch between the table of contents and the search display.

Appendix

427

Click to specify settings such as text size, layout, and display method for the User’s Guide.

Click to display information on how to view the User’s Guide, how to perform a search, and other

information.

/

Click to display the previous or following topic.

Feature Highlights

Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine. Click / / / to toggle the

display by category, or click the sliding display for more information about each category. The sliding display

can be stopped by moving the pointer onto it. Feature Highlights(P. 428)

[Quick Help]

Click to view how to solve problems.

[Notice]

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

Feature Highlights

Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine.

/

Click to display the detailed information. Click to close the window.

Appendix

428

Click to display the corresponding topic page.

Topic Page

Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

/

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

Click to go to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click «Back» on your Web browser.

Click to return to the page top.

Search

Click to display the search screen. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page

you are looking for.

Appendix

429

[Enter keyword(s) here]

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. Search for pages containing all

keywords by spacing keywords apart. Search for only pages with exact matches by enclosing keyword

phrases in double quotation marks.

Search result

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the

page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

Specied keywords appear in bold in search results.

Appendix

430

Viewing User’s Guide

15A8-07Y

Marks

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and

other information are indicated using the marks below.

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to

persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay

attention to these warnings.

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not

performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these

cautions.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,

and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items

carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or

property.

Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a

procedure.

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual

Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type Example

Keys on the operation panel

Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>

<Specify destination.>

Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]

Screens Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User’s Guide are those for the MF244dw. Depending on the

operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the

actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User’s Guide are those for the MF244dw. When differences are

signicant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as «MFXXXX / MFXXXX.»

Appendix

431

Manual Display Settings

15A8-080

Appendix

432

Others

15A8-081

This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other

information.

Appendix

433

Basic Windows Operations

15A8-082

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 434)

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 435)

Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 435)

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 436)

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 437)

Checking the Computer Name(P. 438)

Checking the Printer Port(P. 439)

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 440)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 441)

Displaying the Printer Folder

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Devices and Printers].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 10

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and printers].

Windows Server 2003

[Start] select [Printers and Faxes].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].

Enabling [Network discovery]

If you are using Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012, enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on

your network.

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under

[Network discovery].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]

select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]

[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 10

Appendix

434

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network

discovery] under [Network discovery].

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server

1Open Windows Explorer.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008

[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

Windows 10

Click [ ] select [File Explorer].

2Select [Network] or [My Network Places] in printer server.

To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for

computers.

Shared printers are displayed.

1

Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen

If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided DVD-

ROM, follow the procedure below. The DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as «D:» in this manual. The DVD-ROM drive

name may differ depending on the computer you are using.

Appendix

435

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] enter «D:\MInst.exe» in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] enter «D:\MInst.exe» click [OK]

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] [Run] enter «D:\MInst.exe» click [OK]

Windows 10

Click [Search the web and Windows] enter «D:\MInst.exe» click «D:\MInst.exe» displayed in the search

results

Windows Server 2003

[Start] [Run] enter «D:\MInst.exe» click [OK]

Printing a Test Page in Windows

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.

1Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed

Slot(P. 47)

2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.

Appendix

436

The test page is printed.

Checking the Bit Architecture

If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10

Proceed to step 2.

2Display [System].

Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Windows 10

Click [ ] select [Settings] [System] [About].

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the bit architecture.

For 32-bit versions

[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.

For 64-bit versions

[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.

Appendix

437

Checking the Computer Name

Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10

Proceed to step 2.

2Display [System].

Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Windows 10

Click [ ] select [Settings] [System] [About].

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the computer name.

Appendix

438

Windows Server 2003

1[Start] select [Control Panel] [System].

2Click [Change] in [Computer Name] tab.

3Check the computer name.

Checking the Printer Port

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

439

3In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.

If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine’s IP address

If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the

same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard

TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 201)

Checking Bidirectional Communication

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 434)

Appendix

440

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is

selected.

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , or in the system tray to display the SSID of

the connected wireless LAN router.

Appendix

441

Appendix

442

Notice

15A8-084

International ENERGY STAR Program

As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the

ENERGY STAR Program for energy eciency.

The International ENERGY STAR Oce Equipment Program is an international program that

promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other oce equipment.

The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that

effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors

can participate voluntarily.

The targeted products are oce equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,

facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.

IPv6 Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1

established by the IPv6 Forum.

WEEE and Battery Directives

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE

Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this

indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a

concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when

you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible

impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated

with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural

resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,

approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-

europe.com/battery.

Batteries are not included in MF231.

Environmental Information

Appendix

443

Reducing your environmental impact while saving money

Power Consumption and Activation Time

The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and

set in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this

mode it can print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its

Power Save Mode.

The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.

If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please

consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.

Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.

Energy Star®

The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy

ecient models, which help to minimise environmental impact.

Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benets

and the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.

Paper types

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship

scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media

down to a weight of 64g/m².

Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.

Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)

Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use

of valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.

The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly

recommends that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the

environmental impact of your work with this product at all times.

Disclaimers

The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR

EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

Trademarks

Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, Mac OS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

UFST: Copyright © 1989 — 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.

Appendix

444

Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;

6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems’

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a «PostScript printing device,» «PostScript display device,» or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The Adobe PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and

other countries.

Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other

countries.

Appendix

445

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems’

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a «PostScript printing device,» «PostScript display device,» or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

Copyright

Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.

Appendix

446

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

Version 1.1.

This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:

http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

————————————————————

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 — 26 February 2007

————————————————————

PREAMBLE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide

development of collaborative font projects, to support the font

creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to

provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and

improved in partnership with others.

The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and

redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The

fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,

redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved

names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,

however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The

requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to

any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DEFINITIONS

«Font Software» refers to the set of les released by the Copyright

Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may

include source les, build scripts and documentation.

«Reserved Font Name» refers to any names specied as such after the

copyright statement(s).

«Original Version» refers to the collection of Font Software

components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

«Modied Version» refers to any derivative made by adding to,

deleting, or substituting — in part or in whole — any of the

components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting

the Font Software to a new environment.

«Author» refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical

writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,

modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the

Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

447

1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in

Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.

2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,

redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy

contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be

included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or

in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or

binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.

3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font

Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the

corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the

primary font name as presented to the users.

4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font

Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any

Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the

Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written

permission.

5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,

must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be

distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to

remain under this license does not apply to any document created using

the Font Software.

TERMINATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are

not met.

DISCLAIMER

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT

OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

448

— 1 —

The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions

Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding

license conditions.

Table of Software

Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the License:

See Page

bldimake 2

FreeType 3

snmp 8

Incl 11

JPEG 12

math 13

mDNSResponder 14

mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared) 18

OpenSSL 19

xpm 23

— 2 —

bldimake

Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 The Open Group

All right Reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is

hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that

copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The above copyright

notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise

to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open

Group.

— 3 —

FreeType

The FreeType Project LICENSE

——————————

2006-Jan-27

Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by

David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg

Introduction

============

The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;

some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,

various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the

FreeType Project.

This license applies to all files found in such packages, and

which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license

affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs,

documentation and makefiles, at the very least.

This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG

(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion

and use of free software in commercial and freeware products

alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:

o We don’t promise that this software works. However, we will be

interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is’ distribution)

o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or

full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free’ usage)

o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use

it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge

— 4 —

somewhere in your documentation that you have used the

FreeType code. (`credits)

We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this

software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.

We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and

assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.

Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a

credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus

encourage you to use the following text:

«««

Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType

Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

«««

Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you

actually use.

Legal Terms

===========

0. Definitions

———-—-

Throughout this license, the terms `package’, `FreeType Project’,

and `FreeType archive refer to the set of files originally

distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and

Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project’, be they named as alpha,

beta or final release.

`You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where

`using’ is a generic term including compiling the project’s source

code as well as linking it to form a `program’ or `executable’.

This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType

— 5 —

engine’.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original

FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and

documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its

original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.

If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by

this license, you must contact us to verify this.

The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as

specified below.

1. No Warranty

———-—-

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO

USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

2. Redistribution

———-——-

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and

irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,

display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and

sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code

forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to

authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted

herein, subject to the following conditions:

o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file

(`FTL.TXT) unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to

the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying

documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered,

— 6 —

original files must be preserved in all copies of source

files.

o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that

states that the software is based in part of the work of the

FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also

encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your

documentation, though this isn’t mandatory.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on

the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use

our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid

to us.

3. Advertising

———-—-

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use

the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional

purposes without specific prior written permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the

following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation

or advertising materials: `FreeType Project’, `FreeType Engine’,

`FreeType library’, or `FreeType Distribution’.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to

accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted

material, only this license, or another one contracted with the

authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.

Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType

Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms

of this license.

4. Contacts

———-

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:

— 7 —

o freetype@nongnu.org

Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as

future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.

If you are looking for support, start in this list if you

havent found anything to help you in the documentation.

o freetypedevel@nongnu.org

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,

specific licenses, porting, etc.

Our home page can be found at

http://www.freetype.org

— end of FTL.TXT —

— 8 —

snmp

Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its

documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,

provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that

both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be

used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

software without specific, written prior permission.

CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING

ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL

CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR

ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,

WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,

ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

* All rights reserved.

*

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

*

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*

* Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in

— 9 —

* the code are not to be removed.

* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution

* as the author of the parts of the library used.

* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or

* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

* «This product includes cryptographic software written by

* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)»

* The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library

* being used are not cryptographic related :-) .

* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

* «This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)»

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG «AS IS» AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

*

* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

— 10 —

* copied and put under another distribution licence

* [including the GNU Public Licence.]

*/

Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University

Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its

documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,

provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that

both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used

in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software

without specific, written prior permission.

CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,

INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO

EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF

USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

— 11 —

Incl

Copyright (c) 1994-96 SunSoft, Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,

merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following

conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies

or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS

PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH

THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.

— 12 —

JPEG

«this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.».

— 13 —

math

Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is

preserved.

copysignf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

math_private.h:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

powf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

scalbnf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.

— 14 —

mDNSResponder

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

«License» shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

«Licensor» shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the

License.

«Legal Entity» shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or

are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, «control» means (i) the power,

direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)

ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

«You» (or «Your») shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

«Source» form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software

source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

«Object» form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,

including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media

types.

«Work» shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License,

as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the

Appendix below).

«Derivative Works» shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from)

the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a

whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include

works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative

Works thereof.

— 15 —

«Contribution» shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any

modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor

for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on

behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, «submitted» means any form of electronic,

verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to

communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are

managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding

communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as «Not

a Contribution.»

«Contributor» shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby

grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to

reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work

and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants

to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this

section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,

where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily

infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such

Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or

counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes

direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that

Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any

medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following

conditions:

a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,

trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do

not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

— 16 —

d. If the Work includes a «NOTICE» text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You

distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,

excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the

following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source

form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by

the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the

NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own

attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the

NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as

modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different

license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such

Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies

with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted

for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without

any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the

terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or

product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of

the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the

Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an «AS IS» BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or

conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work

and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,

or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in

writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or

consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use

the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or

malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of

the possibility of such damages.

— 17 —

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You

may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability

obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only

on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You

agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted

against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by

brackets «[]» replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be

enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name

and description of purpose be included on the same «printed page» as the copyright notice for easier

identification within third-party archives.

Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the «License»);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,

software distributed under the License is distributed on an «AS IS» BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing

permissions and limitations under the License.

— 18 —

mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)

* Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

*

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

* and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. («Apple») nor the names of its

* contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this

* software without specific prior written permission.

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS «AS IS» AND ANY

* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

*/

— 19 —

OpenSSL

OpenSSL License

———-——

/* ====================================================================

* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

*

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

*

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

* distribution.

*

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this

* software must display the following acknowledgment:

* «This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)»

*

* 4. The names «OpenSSL Toolkit» and «OpenSSL Project» must not be used to

* endorse or promote products derived from this software without

* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

* openssl-core@openssl.org.

*

* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called «OpenSSL»

* nor may «OpenSSL» appear in their names without prior written

* permission of the OpenSSL Project.

*

* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

* acknowledgment:

* «This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)»

— 20 —

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT «AS IS» AND ANY

* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED

* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

* ====================================================================

*

* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim

* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*

*/

Original SSLeay License

———————-

/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

* All rights reserved.

*

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

*

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

*

— 21 —

* Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in

* the code are not to be removed.

* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution

* as the author of the parts of the library used.

* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or

* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

*

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

* «This product includes cryptographic software written by

* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)»

* The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library

* being used are not cryptographic related :-).

* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

* «This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)»

*

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG «AS IS» AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

*

* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

— 22 —

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

* copied and put under another distribution licence

* [including the GNU Public Licence.]

*/

— 23 —

xpm

Copyright (c) 1989-95 GROUPE BULL

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,

merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following

conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies

or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL GROUPE BULL BE LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of GROUPE BULL shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from GROUPE

BULL.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
0 0 голоса
Рейтинг статьи
Подписаться
Уведомить о
guest

0 комментариев
Старые
Новые Популярные
Межтекстовые Отзывы
Посмотреть все комментарии
  • Напишите инструкцию как ухаживать за коньками кратко
  • Парктроник parkmaster 8 dj 29 инструкция
  • Инструкция к диктофону sony icd p530f
  • Должностная инструкция сестра хозяйка в здравоохранении
  • Амбробене раствор инструкция по применению взрослым при кашле сухом кашле дозировка взрослым